JP5633064B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to, for example, a slot machine. Specifically, it is possible to start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and the display result is derived to a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information. The present invention relates to a slot machine in which one game is completed and a winning can be generated according to a display result derived to the variable display device.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. Rotation is started by operating, and when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. . A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations include small roles, bonuses, and replays. Here, in the winning of a small role, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of small role. In the bonus winning, the player can obtain a profit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus or a big bonus. In the replay winning, a profit can be obtained that the next game can be performed without consuming new medals for setting the bet amount.

  In order for winning of each combination including the bonus combination to occur, generally, a winning flag must be set by winning an internal lottery performed in advance (usually when the start lever is operated). In addition, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination in the internal lottery is aligned with the effective line, and the combination of symbols configuring the winning combination not selected in the internal lottery is not aligned with the effective line. Reel control is performed.

  For such a slot machine, the player can obtain the benefit of not having to consume medals for setting the number of bets by winning a replay. Some RTs (Replay Time) that change the winning probability of replay (improve the winning probability) without changing are defined as advantageous gaming states other than bonuses such as a big bonus and a regular bonus.

Further, in such a slot machine, there is one in which a predetermined effect is executed by a sub-control unit provided separately from the main control unit that controls the progress of the game such as internal lottery and reel control described above. Furthermore, in the field of so-called pachinko gaming machines in which a pachinko ball is fired to play a game, any one of a plurality of effect modes when a predetermined switching condition is established by a sub-side control unit corresponding to the sub-control unit. There is one that executes an effect according to an effect mode that is determined in advance corresponding to the effect mode (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
JP 2005-152336 A

  By applying the technical matter described in Patent Document 1 described above to a conventional slot machine, a plurality of performance modes are installed, and an effect is produced according to an effect mode corresponding to the switched effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. It is conceivable to diversify the contents of the visual effects. However, the types of effect modes are randomly switched on the sub-control unit side regardless of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit. For this reason, it is not possible to make the player interested in which effect mode is currently in effect or in which effect mode is being executed, and it has not been possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to be able to change the type of stage specifying the appearance rate and the aspect of the production, such as the appearance frequency of the current production and the current It is to provide a slot machine capable of improving the interest of the game by paying attention to the type of stage.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
By using a gaming value to set a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game, it becomes possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions . after you change the display of the variable display unit, said plurality of variable display of the plurality of variable display unit I'm in that the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion is finished, the plurality of in the slot machine winning in accordance with the display of the result combinations of the variable display unit can be generated (the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment),
Before the display result of the variable display section is derived for each game, a special prize (big bonus (1) to (1) to ( 3)) and whether to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including re-game winnings (replays (1) to (4)) capable of playing the next game without using the gaming value Pre-determining means (lottery process) to determine
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving the display result of the variable display unit according to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The advance determination means determines that the special prize is allowed to be generated, and when the special prize is not generated, the carry-over means for carrying over the determination to allow the special prize to be generated after the next game ( Special work)
High probability state control means (in the payout process) for controlling to a high probability state (RT1, RT2) in which the probability that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state. The specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay that has been won out of replays (2) to (4) in the process of setting RT1 to the RT counter and controlling to RT1 and controlling to RT1 in accordance with the type of big bonus that has ended To the RT counter and control to RT2, main control unit 41, sub-control unit 91),
Production execution means for executing the production (processing for performing production by the character or background by the sub-control unit 91),
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High probability state ending means for ending the high probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize reaches the prescribed game number ( When it is determined in the winning determination process that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the big bonus. As a result, even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the RT is not terminated, To) and continued until the specified number of games digestion or winning in Ggubonasu,
By making it difficult to specify the start timing of the control to the high probability state, it is difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games, for example, the difficulty of specifying the remaining game number (for example, the trigger for starting control to RT2) For replays (2) to (4), replay (1) improves each winning rate during RT1 winning with high probability, and each combination is composed of “replay” and “bell” To make it difficult to understand that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won or to make it difficult to understand which one has won the replay (2) to (4)),
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize (reel control when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time, such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game)
The effect execution means is a predetermined probability mode (for example, low probability or normal) in which an effect execution probability (appearance rate) determined to execute a specific effect (character effect) is a predetermined probability in the high probability state. And a probability mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of probability modes including a high probability mode (for example, high probability) in which the performance execution probability is higher than the predetermined probability (first embodiment) Including a probability mode determination process by the sub-control unit 91 in FIG.
The probability mode control means enters the high probability mode with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before reaching the predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). Control (see the distribution rate at specific time and the distribution rate at non-specific time in FIG. 16),
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games. A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state .
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The Nau.
(2) A plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
By using a gaming value to set a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game, it becomes possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions. After the variable display unit is variably displayed, the variable display of the plurality of variable display units is terminated by suspending the variable display of the plurality of variable display units, thereby ending the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. In the slot machine (slot machine 1 in the first embodiment) in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of display results of
Before the display result of the variable display section is derived for each game, a special prize (big bonus (1) to (1) to ( 3)) and whether to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including re-game winnings (replays (1) to (4)) capable of playing the next game without using the gaming value Pre-determining means (lottery process) to determine
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving the display result of the variable display unit according to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The advance determination means determines that the special prize is allowed to be generated, and when the special prize is not generated, the carry-over means for carrying over the determination to allow the special prize to be generated after the next game ( Special work) and
High probability state control means (in the payout process) for controlling to a high probability state (RT1, RT2) in which the probability that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state. The specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay that has been won out of replays (2) to (4) in the process of setting RT1 to the RT counter and controlling to RT1 and controlling to RT1 in accordance with the type of big bonus that has ended To the RT counter and control to RT2, main control unit 41, sub-control unit 91),
Production execution means for executing the production (processing for performing production by the character or background by the sub-control unit 91),
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High probability state ending means for ending the high probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize reaches the prescribed game number ( When it is determined in the winning determination process that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the big bonus. As a result, even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the RT is not terminated, To) and continued until the specified number of games digestion or winning in Ggubonasu,
By making it difficult to specify the start timing of the control to the high probability state, it is difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games, for example, the difficulty of specifying the remaining game number (for example, the trigger for starting control to RT2) For replays (2) to (4), replay (1) improves each winning rate during RT1 winning with high probability, and each combination is composed of “replay” and “bell” To make it difficult to understand that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won or to make it difficult to understand which one has won the replay (2) to (4)),
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize (reel control when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time, such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game)
The effect execution means is a predetermined probability mode (for example, low probability or normal) in which an effect execution probability (appearance rate) determined to execute a specific effect (character effect) is a predetermined probability in the high probability state. And a probability mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of probability modes including a high probability mode (for example, high probability) in which the performance execution probability is higher than the predetermined probability (first embodiment) Including a probability mode determination process by the sub-control unit 91 in FIG.
The probability mode control means enters the high probability mode with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before reaching the predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). Control (see the distribution rate at specific time and the distribution rate at non-specific time in FIG. 16),
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games. A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation unit is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation unit. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The Nau.

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of a special prize is permitted after the high probability state is started and before the specified number of games is reached, the special prize permitted by the determination is generated. Otherwise, the high probability state does not end with the determination, and the player is not given a sense of loss. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it is decided that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed while being controlled to a high probability state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

  In addition, when controlled to a high probability state, it is difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games, but after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games reaches before reaching the specified number of games. Is controlled to a high probability mode with a high probability of production execution. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the number of remaining games in the high probability state has reached a predetermined number of games from the frequency at which a specific effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which a specific performance is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

( 3 ) Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
By using a gaming value to set a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game, it becomes possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions . after you change the display of the variable display unit, said plurality of variable display of the plurality of variable display unit I'm in that the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display portion is finished, the plurality of the variable display portions of Viewing the results of the combination can be generated winning in accordance with the slot machine (slot machine 1 in the second embodiment),
Before the display result of the variable display section is derived for each game, a special prize (big bonus (1) to (1) to ( 3)) and whether to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including re-game winnings (replays (1) to (4)) capable of playing the next game without using the gaming value Pre-determining means (lottery process) to determine
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving the display result of the variable display unit according to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The advance determination means determines that the special prize is allowed to be generated, and when the special prize is not generated, the carry-over means for carrying over the determination to allow the special prize to be generated after the next game ( Special work)
High probability state control means (in the payout process) for controlling to a high probability state (RT1, RT2) in which the probability that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state. The specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay that has been won out of replays (2) to (4) in the process of setting RT1 to the RT counter and controlling to RT1 and controlling to RT1 in accordance with the type of big bonus that has ended Is set in the RT counter and controlled to RT2, a main control unit 41, a sub control unit 91),
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High probability state ending means for ending the high probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize reaches the prescribed game number ( When it is determined in the winning determination process that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the big bonus. As a result, even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the RT is not terminated, To) and continued until the specified number of games digestion or winning in Ggubonasu,
By making it difficult to specify the start timing of the control to the high probability state, it is difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games, for example, the difficulty of specifying the remaining game number (for example, the trigger for starting control to RT2) For replays (2) to (4), replay (1) improves each winning rate during RT1 winning with high probability, and each combination is composed of “replay” and “bell” To make it difficult to understand that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won or to make it difficult to understand which one has won the replay (2) to (4)),
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize (reel control when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time, such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game)
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games, and the end of the period A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The effect mode changing means is a specific effect among a plurality of types of effect modes with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before the predetermined number of games. Change to aspect ,
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The Nau.
(4) A plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
By using a gaming value to set a predetermined number of bets (3, but 1 during a regular bonus) for one game, it becomes possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions. After the variable display unit is variably displayed, the variable display of the plurality of variable display units is terminated by suspending the variable display of the plurality of variable display units, thereby ending the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. In the slot machine (slot machine 1 in the second embodiment) in which a winning can be generated according to the combination of display results of
Before the display result of the variable display section is derived for each game, a special prize (big bonus (1) to (1) to ( 3)) and whether to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including re-game winnings (replays (1) to (4)) capable of playing the next game without using the gaming value Pre-determining means (lottery process) to determine
Derivation control means (reel rotation processing) for deriving the display result of the variable display unit according to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The advance determination means determines that the special prize is allowed to be generated, and when the special prize is not generated, the carry-over means for carrying over the determination to allow the special prize to be generated after the next game ( Special work) and
High probability state control means (in the payout process) for controlling to a high probability state (RT1, RT2) in which the probability that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means is higher than the normal gaming state. RT count the number of games specified according to the type of big bonus
Processing for setting to RT1 and controlling to RT1, processing for setting the specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay that has won among the replays (2) to (4) in the winning determination processing to RT2 and controlling to RT2 Control unit 41, sub-control unit 91),
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High probability state ending means for ending the high probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize reaches the prescribed game number ( When it is determined in the winning determination process that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated to control the big bonus. As a result, even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the RT is not terminated, To) and continued until the specified number of games digestion or winning in Ggubonasu,
By making it difficult to specify the start timing of the control to the high probability state, it is difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games, for example, the difficulty of specifying the remaining game number (for example, the trigger for starting control to RT2) For replays (2) to (4), replay (1) improves each winning rate during RT1 winning with high probability, and each combination is composed of “replay” and “bell” To make it difficult to understand that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won or to make it difficult to understand which one has won the replay (2) to (4)),
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize (reel control when a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time, such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game)
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games. A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The effect mode changing means is a specific effect among a plurality of types of effect modes with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before the predetermined number of games. Change to aspect,
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation unit is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation unit. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The Nau.

  According to such a configuration, even if it is determined that the generation of a special prize is permitted after the high probability state is started and before the specified number of games is reached, the special prize permitted by the determination is generated. Otherwise, the high probability state does not end with the determination, and the player is not given a sense of loss. In addition, since the decision to allow the occurrence of a special prize is carried over after the next game by the carryover means, it is decided that the occurrence of a special prize is allowed while being controlled to a high probability state. Can give you a sense of expectation.

In addition, when controlled to a high probability state, it is difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games, but after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games reaches before reaching the specified number of games. Is changed to a specific production mode with a high probability. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the remaining number of games in the high probability state has reached the predetermined number of games from the effect mode of the high probability state effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of production mode , and to improve the interest of the game.

The remaining game number specifying difficulty making means in the slot machines of (1) to (4) may be any means that makes it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in a high probability state. The following may be used.

  Example 1: A combination of big bonuses (1) to (3) that triggers control of RT1 is composed of different symbols for each of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel (see Modified Example (1-2)) .

  Example 2: As a bonus effect, an effect having the same content is executed regardless of the type of bonus that has occurred (see Modification (1-2)).

  Example 3: A liquid crystal display 51 having a display screen larger than that of the variable display device 2 is installed at a position where a player can easily recognize the visual effect. It is configured to be displayed on the winning line of the virtual reel to be variably displayed, and when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) that triggers the control to RT1 wins, it is related to the type of big bonus that has been won. When a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, and one of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of the replay (1) or RT2 is won Regardless of the type of replay that has won a prize, the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 (see Modification (1-3))

  In any of Examples 1 to 3 described above, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in a high probability state. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the frequency of executing the specific performance is increased.

  The remaining game number specifying difficulty means may be constituted by a game control means (main control part 41) for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means (sub control part) for controlling the effect. 91), or both game control means and effect control means. Depending on how the remaining game number specifying difficulty making means is configured, variations of the technique for making it difficult to specify the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games when in a high probability state can be varied.

  In addition, although the said remaining game number identification difficulty making means illustrated the thing which makes it difficult to identify the number of remaining games up to a regulation game number when it is in a high probability state, it is not restricted to this but is in a high probability state. It may be a means for disabling the number of remaining games to make it impossible to specify the number of remaining games up to a specified number of games. Even when the high-probability state control means is configured to include the remaining game number specification disabling means, the same effect as in the case where the specification is difficult is obtained.

(5) When the slot machine is in the high probability state, a predetermined probability mode (for example, a low probability or an effect execution probability (appearance rate)) determined to execute a specific effect (character effect) is determined. Normal mode and a probability mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of probability modes including at least a high probability mode (for example, high probability) in which the performance execution probability is higher than the predetermined probability (second implementation) further comprising a probability mode determination processing) by the sub controller 91 in the form of,
The probability mode control means is configured such that the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games is a predetermined number of games, provided that the effect mode of the high probability state effect is changed to the specific effect mode by the effect mode change unit. Control to a specific probability mode out of the plurality of types of probability modes with a higher probability after reaching the predetermined number of games than before reaching (see FIGS. 22 (a) and (b), for example, third The probability that the low probability is selected as the probability mode when the stage is shifted is higher in the specific time (80%) than in the non-specific time (10%).

According to such a configuration, control is performed to a specific probability mode with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached before reaching the predetermined number of games. For this reason, the player has a predetermined number of remaining games in the high probability state not only based on whether or not the effect mode of the high probability state effect is changed to the specific effect mode, but also from the frequency of execution of the specific effect. Whether or not the number of games has been reached can be predicted. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency of execution of a specific effect and the type of effect mode of the high probability state effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) When the production mode changing means is in the high probability state, the probability after the determination is higher than before the generation of the special winning is determined by the prior determination means. To change to the specific effect mode (see FIG. 21).

According to such a configuration, the player predicts whether or not the number of remaining games in the high probability state has reached a predetermined number of games, depending on whether or not the game has been changed to a specific performance mode, and special It is possible to vary the expectation that it has been determined that the winning is allowed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of effect mode and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the slot machine of (4) to (6), in the high probability state, the presentation mode changing means is configured to execute the predetermined game more than before the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games reaches the predetermined number of games. The number of remaining games up to the specified number of games is not limited to the one that is changed to a specific effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes after reaching the number. It may be changed to a specific effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes before reaching the predetermined game number than after reaching the predetermined game number (modified example ( Refer to 5-2). Further, the probability mode control means is subject to the predetermined game number before the number of remaining games up to the predetermined game number reaches the predetermined game number, on the condition that the effect mode change means has changed to the specific effect mode. It is not limited to the one that is controlled to a specific probability mode among the plurality of types of probability modes after reaching the number of games, but has been changed to the specific effect mode by the effect mode changing means. As a condition, it is controlled to a specific probability mode among the plurality of types of probability modes with a higher probability before reaching the predetermined number of games than after the number of remaining games up to the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games. (Refer to Modification (5-2)). In addition, when the production mode changing unit is in the high probability state , the predetermination unit has a higher probability after the decision is made than before the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is made. In the case of the high probability state, the change is not limited to the specific performance mode, but before being determined after the prior determination means is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize. The direction may be changed to the specific effect mode with a higher probability (see Modification (5-2)). Even if it is a case where it comprises as mentioned above, the same effect as the above is produced.

(7) A predetermined setting operation means operation (reset) on condition that a predetermined operation (an operation to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on) is performed at the time of starting the slot machine. Any one of the allowable stages (1 to 6) having different probabilities that the decision to accept the occurrence of the winning is made by the predetermination means based on the operation of the setting switch 38). An allowable stage setting means for selecting and setting (processing for shifting to the setting change mode by the main control unit 41);
Data for controlling the progress of the game including data indicating the allowable level set by the allowable level setting means is stored so as to be readable and writable, and also while the power supply to the slot machine is interrupted Game data storage means (RAM 41c) in which stored data is backed up;
Double several representation embodiment (first to third stage) representation embodiment data <br/> data storage means to direct mode data readable and writable stores showing the representation embodiment of the high probability state effect running out of (RAM 91c),
Game data initializing means for initializing data stored in the game data storage means when the new allowable stage is set by the allowable stage setting means (processing for initialization by the main control unit 41) When,
At the time of startup of the slot machine, the allowable step regardless of whether a new allowable phase is set by the setting means, the presentation mode data storage means the stored representation embodiment data the initial data (the second stage ) representation embodiment initializing means for setting the (processing for setting the second stage at startup by the sub controller 91) and provided with,
The production mode change determination means
Predetermined number of games per (e.g., every 50 games) means for determining whether either by changing the representation embodiment, the
In games before Symbol slot machine has passed a predetermined period is started (the first one game after startup), the presentation with a high probability than game after a lapse of the predetermined period (second game onwards) after activation effect mode change determining means for determining the effect of changing the aspect (and FIG. 19 (a) (b) see) a.

According to such a configuration, first, the initial data is set by the rendering mode initializing means when the slot machine is activated. Therefore, regardless of whether or not a new allowable stage is set, the production mode is at least the initial state at the time of start-up, so whether or not a new allowable level has been set based on whether or not the production mode has been changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the player will predict whether or not. On the other hand, when only the configuration for setting the initial data at the time of starting the slot machine is provided, the effect at the time of starting is reduced due to the effect mode at the time of starting becoming the initial state, and further, at the time of starting There is a risk that the operating rate will decrease. Therefore, in order to prevent a decrease in interest and operating rate at the time of startup, in the above configuration, the presentation mode is changed with a high probability in a game from when the slot machine is started until a predetermined period elapses. Is done. For this reason, while preventing the occurrence of inconvenience such as the player predicting whether or not the above-described new permissible stage has been set, the types of presentation modes at the time of startup are varied, so that the interest at the time of startup is increased. And it can prevent that an operation rate falls.

The post-starting effect mode change determining means determines whether or not to change the effect mode in response to a predetermined operation being performed in the first game executed after the slot machine is started. In addition, it may be determined that the effect mode is changed with a higher probability than the subsequent games. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the effect mode is changed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game executed first.

(8) the start after demonstration mode change determining means determines the Luca whether to change the representation embodiment in different probabilities depending on data indicating the stored the allowable phase into the game data storage unit (FIG. 19 (See (b)).

According to such a configuration, the player predicts the set allowable stage based on whether or not the presentation mode is changed in the game from when the slot machine is activated until a predetermined period elapses. Can do. For this reason, the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the slot machine at the time of activation can be improved.

(9) the presentation mode change determining means, regardless of the determination of whether or not to change the representation embodiment, the effect mode data stored in the presentation mode data storage means in response to execution of a specific effect Update (see FIG. 19C).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for changing the effect mode when the high-probability mode in which a specific effect is executed is controlled to a high probability mode.
The high probability state effect executing means executes the high probability state effect in any one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes (first to third stages) (selected by the sub control unit 91). Process for displaying effects and backgrounds in a manner specified from the stage)
The presentation mode changing means reaches the predetermined number of games up to the specified number of games on the condition that the high probability state and the probability mode control means controls the high probability mode. After reaching the predetermined number of games than before, it is changed to a specific effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes (processing for selecting a stage by the sub-control unit 91 and making a transition, FIG. 17 (a) and (b), for example, the probability that the second stage is selected when the probability mode is highly accurate is more specific time (80%) than non-specific time (10%). ) Is higher).
According to such a configuration, the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games is changed to a specific effect mode with a higher probability after reaching the predetermined number of games than before. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the number of remaining games in the high probability state has reached the predetermined number of games, not only from the frequency at which a specific effect is executed, but also from the type of effect mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which a specific effect is executed and the type of effect mode that has been changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.
When the probability mode control means is in the high probability state, the probability mode control means has a higher probability after the determination is made before the prior determination means determines that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted. The probability mode is controlled (see FIG. 16).
According to such a configuration, the player predicts whether or not the number of remaining games in the high probability state has reached a predetermined number of games according to the frequency of execution of a specific effect, and generates a special prize. It is possible to vary the feeling of expectation that it has been decided to allow the above. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the frequency at which the specific performance is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.
The probability mode control means controls the high probability mode with a higher probability after reaching the predetermined number of games than before the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games reaches the predetermined number of games. Not limited to the above, the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games may be controlled to the high probability mode with a higher probability before reaching the predetermined number of games than after reaching the predetermined number of games ( Modified example (5-1)). Further, the stage transition means reaches the predetermined number of games up to the specified number of games on the condition that the high probability state and the probability mode control means controls the high probability mode. After reaching the predetermined number of games than before, it is not limited to the one of the plurality of types of stages to be transferred to a specific stage, but is in the high probability state and the probability mode control means On the condition that it is controlled to the high probability mode, the plurality of types of the plurality of types are more likely to be before the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games than after the number of remaining games reaches the predetermined number of games. You may make it transfer to a specific stage among stages (refer modification (5-1)). Further, the probability mode control means, when in the high probability state, has a higher probability after being determined by the prior determination means than before it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed. Not only those that are controlled to the high probability mode, but in the case of the high probability state, before the determination is made after the prior determination means determines that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed. The high probability mode may be controlled with a high probability (see Modification (5-1)). Even if it is a case where it comprises as mentioned above, the same effect as the above is produced.

  The slot machine described above may be a slot machine further provided with a configuration listed below.

(A) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for performing production control based on the received control information (command),
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (commands) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91) in a predetermined priority order. Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means,
The effect control information storage means (reception buffer) has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer).

  According to such a configuration, the effect control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means. In this way, when performing an operation test by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment, The problem that the efficiency of the test cannot be sufficiently increased can be solved. That is, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, the number of control information that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be the storage area of the game control information storage means, that is, a normal game. Thus, it is possible to continuously transmit a large amount of control information up to the limit of the storage area of the production control information storage means without being limited according to the number of storage areas allocated by a number that does not overflow. Therefore, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

(B) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
A predetermined first frame (housing 1a);
A second frame (front door 1b) provided to be openable and closable with respect to the first frame (housing 1a);
An open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) for detecting the open / close state of the second frame (front door 1b);
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) for storing control information (command) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer, door command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Open / close state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open switch 28),
When the open / closed state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the open / closed state detection unit (door open detection switch 25) (ON to OFF or OFF to ON), the control information generation unit Open / close state detection information generating means for generating open / close state detection information (door command) indicating the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) as the control information (command),
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
Opening for determining whether or not the second frame (front door 1b) is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means (door open detection switch 25) indicated by the open / close state detection information (door command). A determination means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame (front door 1b) when the opening determining means determines that the second frame (front door 1b) is open.

  According to such a configuration, it is often necessary to open the second frame in order to perform an illegal act against the slot machine, but when the second frame is opened, the fact is notified. Therefore, fraud against the slot machine can be effectively prevented. Further, the game control means monitors the detection state of the opening / closing state detection means, and when there is a change in the detection state, the opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state after the change is used as control information to the effect control means. By only transmitting, the effect control means determines whether or not the second frame is open based on the detection state of the open / close state detection means indicated by the open / close state detection information transmitted from the game control means, and the determination The opening of the second frame can be notified based on the result. Therefore, the game control means does not need to determine whether or not the second frame is open from the detection state of the open / close state detection means when notifying the opening of the second frame. Control load can be reduced.

(C) It is determined whether an abnormality (for example, a door opening error, a setting change error, a closing error, a payout error, etc.) has occurred, and a signal for specifying the type of the abnormality that has occurred is transmitted in a parallel signal system. Signal transmission means (main control unit 41);
Conversion output means (external output board 1000, parallel serial) having an output unit for converting the signal from the signal transmission means into a serial signal system capable of specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred and outputting the same to the outside of the slot machine Conversion circuit 1002).

  According to such a configuration, a signal for specifying the type of abnormality that has occurred can be output from one output unit, and a plurality of signals can be output by providing an output unit for each type of abnormality as in the past. It is not necessary to provide more output units than necessary as compared with output from the unit.

(D) The high probability state control means controls to a high probability state (RT1) for performing control for deriving the regame winning with a higher probability than the normal gaming state when a predetermined condition (end of big bonus) is satisfied. And
The high-probability state control means may control one of a plurality of states having different probabilities that a decision to allow the occurrence of a re-game winning is made (see Modification (8)). . Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of state is controlled, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this case, the high probability state control means is further configured to control to the first high probability state (RT1) on the condition that the control to the special gaming state has ended.
Further, the pre-determining means controls the first regame winning (replay b) and the second regame winning (replay) among at least a plurality of types of regame winnings when being controlled to the first high probability state. c) determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize so that the probability of allowing the derivation is higher than the normal gaming state;
The high probability state control means includes:
On the condition that the first re-game winning is generated in the first high probability state, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted is the first Control to the second high probability state (RT2), which is advantageous to the player higher than the one high probability state,
On the condition that the second re-game winning is generated in the first high probability state, the probability that the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the re-game winning is permitted is the first It may be configured to control to a disadvantageous state (RT3) for a player who does not control to the second high probability state even if the first regame winning is generated lower than the one high probability state (Modification) (See (8)).

  According to such a configuration, when the control is performed to the first high probability state, a sense of expectation for the control to the second high probability state is provided, and an anxiety to the control to the disadvantageous state is provided. Compared to a slot machine that is not controlled to the second high probability state or the disadvantageous state, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as described above, a plurality of special prizes are provided, and when controlling to a special gaming state according to the type of special prize that has occurred, the high probability state control means The probability that the pre-determining means determines that the first re-game winning is permitted, and the pre-deciding means determines that the second re-game winning is allowed. It is possible to control to a plurality of types of first high probability states having different probabilities of at least one of the probabilities, and to the first high probability state (RT1, RT1 ′, RT1 ″) according to the type of the special game state that has been completed. You may comprise so that it may control (refer modification (8)).

  According to such a configuration, the following effects can be obtained as compared with the conventional slot machine in which the big bonus is terminated and the RT symbol is derived, that is, controlled to a high probability state according to a certain probability. Which type of special winning will occur, that is, the type of special winning that is controlled to the first high probability state of the type that has a high probability of being determined to allow the occurrence of the first re-game winning? Can attract the attention of the player. In addition, it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation for the control to the more advantageous second high-probability state according to the type of special gaming state to be controlled, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be made.

(E) The high probability state control means controls to the high probability state (RT) on the condition that the special gaming state has ended,
The special prize for generating the special prize is a combination of different types of identification information for each of the plurality of variable display areas (for example, big bonus (1) is “red 7-grape-melon”, big bonus (2) For example, "Grape-White 7-Black BAR")
The production execution means
The type controlled to the special gaming state is controlled so that it becomes difficult for the player to be specified between the occurrence of the special prize and the end of the special gaming state (the same regardless of the bonus type). A bonus presentation of the content may be performed) (see Modification (1-2)).

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to identify the type of the special prize that has occurred from the display result, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice which type of special gaming state is being controlled. For this reason, the number of games controlled to a high probability state becomes difficult to understand compared to the conventional slot machine in which the type of special prize is specified from the display result. Can effectively improve the interest of the game.

(F) A game value giving means (payout process) for giving a predetermined amount of game value to a player when a winning prize is generated among the plurality of types of winnings;
Procedure for performing procedure notification control (navigation effect) for notifying the player of information that can specify a procedure (including operation timing, operation order, etc.) for deriving a winning that is allowed to be derived by the prior determination means A notification means (game effect execution process),
The procedure notification means performs the procedure notification control until a predetermined notification period (the number of AT continuing games during AT) elapses from a predetermined timing after being controlled to the high probability state.
The expected value of the amount of gaming value given by the gaming value granting unit per game in the high probability state is a procedure specified from the information notified by the procedure notification unit when it is within the notification period. When the stop operation means is operated, the amount of game value used for setting the bet amount is larger than the amount of game value used for setting the bet number. (See modification (9)).

  According to such a configuration, the expected value of the amount of gaming value given when in the high probability state and within the notification period is determined by operating the number of bets by operating according to the procedure specified from the notified information. More than the amount of game value used for setting. The high probability state is continued at least as long as no special prize is generated. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the high probability state ends before the notification period elapses when the player performs a stop operation in a procedure that does not lead to the special winning. As a result, the player does not generate a special prize and performs a stop operation according to the procedure specified from the notified information, so that the amount of games to be given when the player is in a high probability state and within the notification period. Useful value can be acquired. In addition, after the notification period has elapsed, it is possible to add interest such as generating a special prize and controlling the game to a special game state, thereby improving the fun of the game.

(G) Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Effect control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling the effect based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (for example, a touch panel, various switches) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game. )
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. And during-inspection control prohibition means to be prohibited.

  According to such a configuration, in order to inspect whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the game control means for operation test is connected to the performance control means and the operation test is performed. In this case, when the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, control based on reception of new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. Therefore, unless the detection of the operation detection state of the effect operation means is performed, the operation does not shift to the operation based on reception of new control information. For example, the effect control means receives the test control information of the effect operation means. After that, even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.

  Note that the control information may be information indicating the control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control. In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits control based on reception of new control information may not be reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. Control based on the above may not be performed.

(H) In the slot machine of (G), the effect operating means detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) and specifies the operated position. Including touch panel
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. Abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor Since it is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.

  The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the detection of the sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time, and thereafter not use the invalidated sensor, or periodically invalidate the sensor. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

(I) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings,
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum, watermelon) among the general prizes (small role, replaying role) has been determined, and a combination of symbols (orange- The stop operation means (stop switch 8L, at a timing (withdrawing range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) constituting orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon) can be drawn. 8C, 8R), a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5). , Plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon), and the specific general prize (orange, plum, It is determined that the occurrence of squid) is permitted, and the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are at timings other than the timing at which the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) can be drawn (outside the drawing range). ) Is operated, a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon) for generating the specific general winning in any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) -Watermelon-watermelon)
In the variable display area (the reel that has already been stopped) from which the display result has already been derived, the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) does not stop on any winning line, and one or more variable display areas In a state where the display result has not yet been derived (a state in which any of the reels is changing), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum) for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result has not yet been derived. , Watermelon), when the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range), one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5). You may comprise so that the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) may be led out on one winning line.

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, the specific general winning symbol is not stopped in any winning line in the variable display area in which the display result has already been derived, and one or more variable Even in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in the display area, that is, in a state where it is not possible to derive a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize that has already been allowed, leaving a variable display area being fluctuating, If the stop operation means is operated at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn for the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is derived on one of the multiple winning lines, so It is decided to allow the occurrence of general winnings, and the combination of symbols to generate the already allowed specific general winnings is derived while leaving the variable display area being changed. Depending on whether a particular regular winning symbols are derived can be not state an even also on one winning line making, it can be easily determined whether or not the missed certain regular winning.

(J) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings,
And further comprising stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving a display result of the variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R),
The derivation control means includes
It has been determined that the occurrence of a specific general prize (orange, plum, watermelon) among the general prizes (small role, replaying role) has been determined, and a combination of symbols (orange- The stop operation means (stop switch 8L, at a timing (withdrawing range) at which a specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) constituting orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon) can be drawn. 8C, 8R), a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange) for generating the specific general winning on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5). , Plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon), and the specific general prize (orange, plum, It is determined that the occurrence of squid) is permitted, and the stop operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) are at timings other than the timing at which the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) can be drawn (outside the drawing range). ) Is operated, a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon) for generating the specific general winning in any of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) -Watermelon-watermelon)
Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) for which display results have already been derived, one or more variable display areas (stopped reels) contain the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon). Among the two or more variable display areas (stopped reels) that are stopped on any one of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5) and from which the display result has already been derived In the remaining variable display areas (stopped reels), the specific general winning symbol (orange, plum, watermelon) is not stopped on the one winning line, and is still displayed in one or more variable display areas. In a state where no symbol is derived (a state in which any reel is changing), the specific general winning symbol (oren) for the variable display area (the reel being changed) for which the display result has not been derived yet. , Plum, watermelon) when the stop operating means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing (within the pull-in range), the specific general winning symbol (orange) on the one pay line , Plum, watermelon) may be controlled to be derived.

  According to such a configuration, in the conventional slot machine, when a specific winning is won in the internal lottery and when the selected winning is missed, the specific display mode is stopped, so that the winning winning is achieved. You can determine to some extent that you have missed, but if you do not know the specific display mode that stops when you miss, you will not know that you have missed the winning prize, and in this case the prize simply was not won It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to determine whether the winning prize was missed or not. That is, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific general winning is permitted, and one or more variable display areas of two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived have any one of the specific general winning symbols. Of the two or more variable display areas for which display results have already been derived, and the specific variable pattern is not stopped on the single winning line in the remaining variable display areas. In addition, the display result has not been derived yet in one or more variable display areas, that is, the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings with the variable display area being changed cannot be derived. Even if the stop operation means is operated at a timing at which the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in the remaining variable display area, the specific general winning symbol is already stopped on the one winning line. Since the fixed general winning symbol is derived, it is determined that the generation of the specific general winning is allowed, and the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winning is generated with the variable display area being changed. Even if it is not possible, it can be easily determined whether or not a specific general prize has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general prize symbol is derived on one winning line.

  Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. Good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet number determined according to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the specific general winning symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

  In addition, when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, it is preferable to include a notification means for notifying the possibility that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted. If it is informed that there is a possibility that the generation of the specific general winnings is permitted at the stage where the combination of symbols for generating the already permitted specific general winnings cannot be derived, the remaining variable display area Operate the stop operation means at the timing when the specific general winning symbol can be drawn in, and the specific general winning symbol is derived on any one of the plurality of winning lines, or the specific general winning symbol has already stopped. It is possible to determine whether or not a specific general winning symbol has been missed depending on whether or not a specific general winning symbol is derived on one winning line. Prize in some cases more than one, whether the missed any particular regular winning can be accurately determined.

(K) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings,
The derivation control means includes
As a result of display of the plurality of variable display areas, it is determined that the generation of a specific general prize (orange, plum, watermelon) among the general prizes (small role, replaying role) is determined. A specific general winning is generated on a first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or a second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5). Control to derive a combination of symbols (Orange-Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum, Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum, watermelon) to determine independently that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and generation of a special general prize different from the specific general prize Second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2), watermelon + 1 sheet (3)) for determining at the same time that the allowance is allowed, the occurrence of the specific general prize and the occurrence of the special prize The third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3)) that simultaneously decides that the special general prize is allowed, the special general prize is given, Fourth determination to simultaneously determine whether to allow and allow the occurrence of the special prize (Orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), Plum + 1 (2) + BB (2), Watermelon + 1 (3) + BB (3 ) It is possible to perform,
The combined probability of the probability of making the first decision (orange, plum, watermelon) and the probability of making the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3)) The ratio of the probability of making the third decision to occupy, the probability of making the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), watermelon + 1 (3)) and the fourth The fourth determination in the total probability of the determination (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2), watermelon + 1 sheet (3) + BB (3)) The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that is different from the ratio of the probability that
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition in which the first determination (orange, plum, watermelon) or the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3)) is made is satisfied, A combination of symbols (orange-) for causing the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) to generate the specific general winning line at a higher rate than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5). (Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum, Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon)
The second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2), watermelon +1 (3)) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum +1 (2) ) + BB (2), watermelon + 1 sheet (3) + BB (3)), when the second condition is satisfied, the first winning line (the winning lines L4, L5) is placed on the first winning line. Control for deriving a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon) for generating the specific general prize at a higher rate than the line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) You may comprise so that it may perform.

  According to such a configuration, in a conventional slot machine, it is possible to win a small role alone, a small role and a special role at the same time. It is possible to expect a special role to be won according to the stop mode of the reel by making the stop control used at the time of simultaneous winning of the Since the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of special roles is different, it can be determined from the player whether or not the special role is won according to the stop mode, so if the special role is not won The problem that expectation is lost can be solved. That is, when the first determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived, and the second determination or When the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the third determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the fourth determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the third decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the third decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the fourth decision Since the ratio of the probability of the fourth determination to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

(L) The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying the plurality of types of identification information, and the identification information is derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas. Is possible,
One game is completed when display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (reel 2L, 2C, and 2R display areas), and a plurality of display results are derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas. In accordance with the combination of symbols derived and displayed on any of the winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5),
The multiple types of winnings include general winnings (small roles, replaying roles) other than the special winnings,
The derivation control means includes
As a result of display of the plurality of variable display areas, it is determined that the generation of a specific general prize (orange, plum, watermelon) among the general prizes (small role, replaying role) is determined. A specific general winning is generated on a first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) or a second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) of the plurality of winning lines (winning lines L1 to L5). Control to derive the combination of symbols (Orange-Orange-Orange, Plum-Plum-Plum, Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon)
The pre-determining means includes
First determination (orange, plum, watermelon) to determine independently that the occurrence of the specific general prize is permitted, the fact that the specific general prize is allowed, and generation of a special general prize different from the specific general prize Second determination (orange + 1 sheet (1), plum + 1 sheet (2), watermelon + 1 sheet (3)) for determining at the same time that the allowance is allowed, the occurrence of the specific general prize and the occurrence of the special prize The third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3)) that simultaneously decides that the special general prize is allowed, the special general prize is given, Fourth determination to simultaneously determine whether to allow and allow the occurrence of the special prize (Orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), Plum + 1 (2) + BB (2), Watermelon + 1 (3) + BB (3 ) It is possible to perform,
Probability of making the first decision (orange, plum, watermelon) and the fourth decision (orange + 1 (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 (2) + BB (2), watermelon + 1 (3 ) + BB (3)) and the probability of the fourth decision making up the total probability, and the second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), watermelon +1 sheet (3)) and the third determination occupying the combined probability of the third determination (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3)) The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that is different from the ratio of the probability that
The derivation control means includes
The first decision (orange, plum, watermelon) or the fourth decision (orange + 1 sheet (1) + BB (1), plum + 1 sheet (2) + BB (2), watermelon + 1 sheet (3) + BB (3) )) Is established, the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3) is higher than the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5). Control to derive a combination of symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon) for generating the specific general winning,
The second decision (orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), watermelon + 1 (3)) and the third decision (orange + BB (1), plum + BB (2), watermelon + BB (3 )) Is established, the second winning line (winning lines L4, L5) is higher than the first winning line (winning lines L1, L2, L3). You may comprise so that the combination of the symbols (orange-orange-orange, plum-plum-plum, watermelon-watermelon-watermelon) for generating the said specific general prize may be derived.

  According to such a configuration, when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning on the first winning line is derived. In the case where the second determination or the third determination is made, there is a high possibility that a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning in the second winning line is derived. That is, when a specific general winning is generated when the first determination or the fourth determination is made, and when a specific general winning is generated when the second determination or the third determination is made. A winning line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is easily derived is different. The ratio of the probability that the fourth decision is made in the combined probability of the probability that the first decision is made and the probability that the fourth decision is made, the probability that the second decision is made, and the third decision Since the ratio of the probability of the third decision to the total probability is different from the probability of being made, the combination of symbols for generating the specific general prize was derived when the specific general prize was generated It is possible to change the degree of expectation that a special winning is permitted by the winning line. Furthermore, when a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line, a combination of symbols for generating a specific general winning is derived in the second winning line. In both cases, it is suggested that special prizes may be allowed to occur, but whether or not special prizes are allowed from the prize line from which a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize is derived. It is impossible to discriminate, and the player's expectation that special winnings are allowed is lost regardless of which winning line the symbol combination for generating a specific general winning is derived. It won't be lost.

  The control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning at a higher rate than the second winning line in the first winning line means that the first winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize. Further, the control for deriving the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winning in the second winning line at a rate higher than that in the first winning line means that the second winning line is at the rate of 100%. This includes a control for deriving a combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of symbols for generating the specific general winnings may be the same type of symbols or different symbols. That is, the combination of symbols for generating a specific general prize may be a combination of symbols of the same type or may include different symbols.

DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS First Embodiment Hereinafter, an embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view showing the overall structure of the slot machine according to this embodiment. The slot machine 1 includes a housing 1a (not shown) whose front surface is open, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are horizontally arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 3, “orange”, “plum”, “watermelon”, “bell”, “replay”, “black cherry” (black paint in FIG. 3) are provided on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. ”,“ Net cherry (net-painted cherry in FIG. 3) ”,“ white cherry (white cherry in FIG. 3) ”,“ black 7 (black 7 in FIG. 3) ”, A plurality of identifiable symbols such as “net 7 (mesh 7 in FIG. 3)” and “white 7 (white 7 in FIG. 3)” are drawn in a predetermined order. It is. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively. In addition, the portions other than the portions on which the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are drawn are white, and light is transmitted with high transmittance. The portions on which the symbols are drawn also correspond to the colors of the symbols. It is designed to transmit light.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the reference position and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are irradiated with white light from the back side. A reel LED 55 is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  Further, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. There are two types of liquid crystal displays: a non-glare type liquid crystal display with non-glare processing on the surface of the liquid crystal panel and a glare type liquid crystal display with glare processing (gloss processing). In the embodiment, a glare type liquid crystal display in which glare processing is applied to the surface of the display area 51a is used. In addition, a backlight (not shown) that irradiates the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and a concealing member that conceals the inside is further provided on the back surface. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a medal is inserted using a medal insertion unit 4 into which a medal can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which a medal is paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). A single BET switch 5 operated when setting the number of bets for a minute, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the gaming state within the range (the normal game described later in this embodiment) MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting a state (also referred to as an initial gaming state), 3 in RT (replay time) 1-2, and 1 in a regular bonus provided during a big bonus described later, as credits Operation when the medal used for setting the medal and the bet number stored is settled (the medal used for the credit and bet number setting is returned) The player can operate the settlement switch 10, the start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. Each is provided.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 4).

  Further, inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, and changing a set value described later A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time or during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, are provided in a hopper tank 34 a provided inside the housing 1 a (See FIG. 2) The flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout exit 9 side, the inserted medal that is inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flows down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) having a sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), the reel unit 2 including the reel LED 55, the external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, the hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals stored in the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided. .

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. A reset that functions as a setting switch to change the setting value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery, which will be described later DOO / setting switch 38, a power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line determined according to the gaming state among the winning lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the start switch 7 is operated. Is in a valid state, that is, a state where the game can be started. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, a winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed. The winning line L2 set across the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the winning line L3 set over the lower symbols, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper right side. There are 5 types of winning lines L4 set across the symbols lined up in a row, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L5 set across the symbols lined down to the right. In the normal gaming state, RT1 to RT2, when a specified number of bets are set, all of the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, and in the regular bonus A betting amount prescribed number is set only pay line L1 is activated.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is When operated, the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R stop rotating and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 milliseconds. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and 80 x 21 (number of symbols per reel) = 1680 frames, so the symbols of 4 frames at maximum are available in 190 milliseconds. Can be pulled in. In other words, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of them, for a total of five symbols.

  For this reason, for example, when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower stage of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is used as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead Since the symbols can be displayed in the lower row, as a result, the symbols from the symbol to six frames ahead can be displayed in the upper row. That is, in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated, within 7 frames including the symbols displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch. The arranged symbols can be displayed on the winning line.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in the present embodiment). Random number generation circuit 42 for generating a random number, sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, an initialization command is not input when the power is turned on or from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 that sometimes gives a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the above and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the main CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It has become so.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number, and in the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 according to the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are processed by software instead of using the random numbers extracted by the hardware random number function as they are. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main) and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop (for example, whether or not the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage). Is a circuit that outputs the signal. Although not specifically shown, the main control unit 41 includes an interrupt input terminal. When a voltage drop signal is input to the interrupt input terminal, an external interrupt occurs, and the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 Performs power interruption interrupt processing according to external interrupts. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  In the power interruption interrupt process, the execution of other interrupt processes is prohibited with the start of the process. Then, a process of saving all registers that may be in use to the RAM is performed. As a result, it is possible to return to the original processing when the power interruption is restored.

  Next, after all output ports are initialized, a RAM parity is calculated based on all data stored in the RAM, set in a predetermined parity storage area, and RAM access is prohibited. Then, a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the main control unit 41 reliably stops operation when power is interrupted.

  Thus, in the power interruption processing, the RAM parity at that time is calculated and stored in the parity storage area, and stored in the RAM by comparing with the RAM parity calculated at the next startup. It is possible to check whether the data being processed is normal.

  Next, the reset circuit 49 outputs a reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the voltage rises to a level at which the main control unit 41 can be activated when the power is turned on, and activates the main control unit 41. When the value of the reset counter is counted up without being cleared based on a signal periodically output from the main control unit 41, that is, when the main control unit 41 does not operate for a certain time, The reset signal is output to restart the main control unit 41.

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  The production control board 90 is connected to electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and a microcomputer including an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an effect driving LED 52, an LED driving circuit 93 for controlling driving of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling audio output from the speakers 53, 54, Switch detection for detecting a detection signal input from a reset circuit 95 for supplying a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and switches connected to the effect control board 90 Circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information The clock device 97, the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the sub-control unit 91; A touch panel controller 99 for performing processing for specifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the devices 56b and 57b, other circuits, and the like are mounted. In response to the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the output information from the touch panel controller 99, various controls for performing the performance are performed, and each part of the control circuit mounted on the performance control board 90 is directly or Control indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when a winning symbol is aligned on any winning line of the variable display device 2. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to big bonuses, small roles with payout of medals, and the setting of the number of bets. There is a re-playing role that allows the next game to be started. The big bonus may be indicated as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be indicated as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order to win each winning combination determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 5, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is a challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, there is a gaming state between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a signal during CT indicating that the challenge time is in progress and a signal during CB indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge bonus is connected, and there is a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future. It is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal among these external output signals, The setting change signal, the input error signal, and the payout error signal are converted into a security signal, which is a serial signal that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and externally converted. The door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be output from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a serial signal, and is output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal may be output by an AND circuit. If it is output, an error signal may be output to the outside with one terminal. Even in this case, an error occurs in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. It is possible to specify that any of them is occurring, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used by the main CPU 41a to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above, for example, in order to manage sales in the hall computer. And a control for outputting a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that control for canceling the output must be performed. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment detects the main CPU 41a when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined. Outputs medals IN signals for the set number of bets together.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collected. Since it is outputted to the outside, it becomes possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the betting number, and the control relating to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a according to the present embodiment indicates that, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Outputs OUT signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 6B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected during medal payout, or the medals continue. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal is actually output. Since the number of medals paid out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals that are originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotating shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 8A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 8B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 8B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 8B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being stopped, and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from deviating from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without performing the next game start operation), and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released when (the same timing as) has elapsed (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, if a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the next game, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so the player is playing a game. In the meantime, it is possible to maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced. On the other hand, in a state in which the player is unlikely to play, the load on the component parts of the stepping motor can be reduced.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and 3 By performing the reel motor stop control together with the phase excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and then the three-phase excitation stop control. As a result, the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. The inner rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. General work consists of data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, the total number of medals paid out in the BB, and a winning flag that is initialized at the end of each game (small role, replay ) And a winning flag are stored. The special work is initialized at the time of winning without being cleared at the end of each game, data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc. This is a work in which a winning flag (big bonus (1) to (3)) and a game state flag for specifying the game state of the next game are stored. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and is set to 1 after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before transition to the setting change mode). The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a starts up when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, or when only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When the BB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both turned off and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. At this time, five types of initializations with different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and when the transition to the setting change mode is performed, when initialization is performed or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized. Initialization 1 is the state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is the initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except for the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost, so the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the set stop phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and the mode is changed to the setting change mode. At this time, the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting change by maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work. In this case, these stop phases can be specified. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is used as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set and set in the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting change. Motor 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Then, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a is the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excitation in match condition, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) without performing the game start operation, similarly to the excitation state of the stop phase maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the standby timing (same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) elapses, and by doing so, there is no burden on the parts constituting the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and if it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or Until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated), the game is controlled to a full error state in which the progress of the game is disabled.

  In the present embodiment, medals thrown in from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and medals overflowing when the hopper tank 34a is full are stored in the overflow tank 35. The full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. However, the overflow tank 35 is not provided, and whether or not the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a exceeds a certain amount. A full tank sensor may be provided to detect whether the hopper tank 34a is full, and the full tank sensor is used to detect the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects a full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, the effective insertion of medals is performed. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 9, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits. If no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, medals stored in the overflow tank 35 based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control ends. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage in the tank is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, even if a game in which no medals are inserted from the outside, it is monitored whether or not the amount of medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full. However, the amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full despite the fact that the amount of stored medals does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored as to whether or not the game has entered the state, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player. There is also a problem that increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game. It is not detected and the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not it is full is not performed wastefully, and the full state can be monitored efficiently. The control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor required for the store clerk to resolve the full tank status. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is made, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game starts without the medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the tank is in a tan state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank condition.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of medals is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without inserting medals. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. The full tank error state is controlled before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state in which the medal is paid out and controlling to a full tank error state and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not a full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the tank is full is determined at the timing when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the game is full at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, or to start the game. You may make it determine whether it is a full state at the time of operation detection, or the time of completion | finish of game control.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. Note that the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 11, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is completed, that is, when a re-game player wins in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted, and the determination of whether or not it is a full tank error is performed wastefully. The full tank state can be monitored efficiently, the control load required to determine the full tank state can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Or to the Shii I think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, Controls to, when the subsequent full Tan'era state is released, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. Further, since the determination of the full tank state and the control of the full tank error state associated therewith are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game state command, standby for the effect control board 90 A plurality of types of commands including a command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a setting value command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, RT or big bonus, etc.), the number of remaining RT games, and the currently set value. This command is transmitted after a setting end command, which will be described later, and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The set value command is a command indicating the set value currently set, and is transmitted when the setting is changed and when the power is turned on.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. or some or disabled state (one BET switch 5, MAXBET reception operation of the switch 6 is a capable betting amount setting state, and by betting amount prescribed number is set yet Orazu, further It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in start-up processing and game processing described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt processing described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game ends, a door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the settlement switch 10 is changed. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and the operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is performed by timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. A plurality of commands can be transmitted by transmitting only one of a command stored in the command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Are transmitted at intervals of at least 2.24 ms, the sub-control unit 91 can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  Note that the timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the basic process for the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  In this embodiment, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area where a plurality of commands can be stored. The command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer are provided. Alternatively, it is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands. (In the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that.) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that if the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or if the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting for transmission (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. More specifically, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25 is made positive logic in the port input processing performed in any of timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt processing (main), that is, every 0.56 ms. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, a logical state of about 100 ms (door monitoring process 45 times) is performed for the fixed state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the above-described port input process (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door command is performed with priority over the normal command, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed in the same manner as other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. As a result, even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, it is normal that after the door command is transmitted and before the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input processing performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to a positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) are acquired, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2; that is, the switch monitoring processing performed every 2.24 ms is 1 acquired in the port input processing described above. The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to OR each separately and use the result to make one BET switch 5, M Determining XBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In the present embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. In this case, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, and when a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the first timer interrupt is performed thereafter. The command received by the process (sub) is read and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command is provided for each of a plurality of types of stages (for example, a first stage to a third stage to be described later) for specifying the mode of effect by the character and the background. Control patterns of these effect devices, such as patterns, lighting effects of the effect effect LEDs 52, output aspects of the speakers 53 and 54, and lighting conditions of the reel LEDs, are registered. When receiving the command, the sub CPU 91a refers to the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command among the control patterns registered corresponding to the stage set in the RAM 91c in the game in the control pattern table. The rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. That is, the sub CPU 91a controls the effect device so as to execute the effect according to the received command in a mode specified from the set stage type. The plurality of types of stages in the present embodiment include background images displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, characters appearing, sound effects / game sounds output from the speakers 53, 54, lighting patterns of the effect effect LEDs 52, and the like. At least one of the aspects is set to be different.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by reception of a certain command (excluding a continuous effect described later), the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, An effect based on a control pattern corresponding to a newly received command is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when a betting number setting operation is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the betting number has been set, the effect being executed is displayed. It is supposed to cancel. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is finished. In such a case, the production is continued unnecessarily even though there is an intention to finish the game by ending the performance being executed. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  The stage is selected according to the distribution rate described later and set in the RAM 91c. The stage allocation ratio is registered in a stage determination table stored in the ROM 91b, and the sub CPU 91a refers to the allocation ratio registered in the stage determination table, and a plurality of stages are allocated in accordance with the allocation ratio. One of the stages is selected, and the selected stage is set in the RAM 91c as the subsequent stage. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes an effect by a character or background in a manner specified from the set stage.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the stage set in the game, and The effect device is controlled based on the above.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the bonus finalization effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and even if a standby command is received in such a state, the demo pattern is not displayed. It is not referred to as a control pattern, and a demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special role is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special role has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until an initialization command or a power-on command is received after the startup and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once in order to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). Even if it is used and illegally set to win the special role, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role has been won. Thus, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won to a player at the start of sales at a game shop.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively suppress illegal sales such as providing slot machines 1 that are set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command indicating that the special role is won and the sub-control unit 91 receives the power-on command, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 that controls the special role. It is executed by a production device such as the LED 52, the speaker 53, 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is set illegally, the special control is made when the main control unit 41 is restarted. The winning device is informed that the winning is made and it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool is used when the game player starts business. It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, In addition, when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 are notified of the special role winning. Also good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In such a case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even when a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door open notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door open notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door open) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door opening notification is stopped. If the opening notification is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. To do.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is made.

  Although it is necessary to open the front door 1b in order to perform some fraudulent action on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, in the present embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, Since the fact is notified, it is possible to effectively prevent such a fraud and to detect it early even if a fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and indicates the detection state after the change when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. Only by transmitting a door command, it is not determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a indicates a door opening detection switch indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of 25, and the door opening notification is performed based on the determination result. Therefore, the main CPU 41a opens the front door 1b. In the notification, it is determined whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening). Detection chattering prevention determination of the switch 25) is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Further, even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game ends. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can always be acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Also, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In the present embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. However, even if the door open detection switch 25 detection state changes while waiting for transmission of a power-on command or an initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the door command and normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If the door command is stored while interrupting the message in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed is overwritten, and the door command is partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a command is stored, and when reels are shaken or medals are paid out. There is a possibility of affecting other controls such as blurring, but the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above, so that the door command is regularly used for basic processing. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing and stored in the transmission buffer within the timer interrupt processing (main) that is executed by interrupting the interrupt, it is necessary to prohibit the interruption when storing the normal command And the above problems can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25, and after the door command is transmitted, the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is further transmitted. It is set to about 100 ms, which is longer than about 72 ms required until the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, and the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are used in the progress of the game. When an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state changes the detection state of these switches, the operation reception of these switches is a valid period for the progress of the game. The sub CPU 91a can specify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing that coincides with the timing at which the game is activated and the game control proceeds, if the operation of these switches is in an invalid state, that is, the timing is not directly related to the game progress control. It becomes possible to execute.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection unit is not installed, but it is originally installed to advance the game, and the operation unit detects the game using the operation unit detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10 are operated, and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when a door command transmission is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. Even so, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer. If an operation detection command is stored while the normal command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, and the rotation of the reel Other controls, such as blurring when paying out medals, may affect other controls. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored with a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and when the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 according to the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (game control board for testing) before shipment. .

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output By designating the component corresponding to the port and its operation mode by the inspection command, it is possible to inspect the operation of the designated component. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical component during the bonus, and the BGM output during the bonus are designated.

  One inspection command can specify only one output port, a component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode. When inspecting by operating different components of the output port at the same time, each output can be specified. Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to continuously transmit 40 inspection commands in this embodiment even if only a test for operating all the electrical components is performed, and the operation of components other than the electrical components is also tested at the same time. When performing, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of electrical components, an inspection command that specifies the operation of a speaker, and an inspection command that specifies the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. It is prohibited to receive new commands until When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation mode in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration component are specified. Operate with.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals transmitted continuously during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in a reception buffer that stores a command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer is provided. Thus, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated in such a number as to prevent overflow in the case of a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) ), And a large number of inspection commands can be transmitted continuously up to the limit of the storage area of the reception buffer (128 commands in this embodiment). Can effectively increase the efficiency.

  In the present embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually specified and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting inspection commands for designating a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each effect part operates normally. .

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, an effect part corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands on the basis of the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer. In this case, even when test commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command, but with one inspection command. It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing performance tests for all production parts at once, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production part are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so operation is more efficient. A test can be performed.

  Further, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as the touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. In this case, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation There is a problem that the test is shifted to the test, and the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives an inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel and performs the operation check of the touch panel, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, no new command is received. Even if a new command is sent during this period, a new command is detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Is not received, and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected until the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, for example, buttons and dials may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be applied. In the same way as above, even if the inspection command is erroneously sent without waiting for the completion of the operation check, the operation check is performed by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected. The test can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the test command for specifying the operation check can be used. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning combinations, combinations of symbols in the variable display device 2, gaming state read out as a lottery target combination, and other information. As the types of RTs in the present embodiment, RT1 to RT2 having different probabilities of winning the re-gamer are provided. RT1 is controlled when one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is finished. RT2 is controlled when one of the replays (2) to (4) wins. Note that the gaming state controlled by RT1 to RT2 may be simply referred to as RT.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (2) is awarded when a combination of “network 7−network 7−network 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. The big bonus (3) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-white 7-white 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) wins, the gaming state shifts to any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) corresponding to the winning combination.

  When the big bonus (1) to (3) is controlled, the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. While the gaming state is in the big bonus, the corresponding big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Further, during the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. That is, while the big bonus medium flag is set to the ON state, the regular bonus medium flag is repeatedly set to the ON state when the regular bonus medium flag is not set to the ON state when the game is started. The

  Each of the big bonuses (1) to (3) ends on the condition that the number of medals paid out to the player is 270 or more.

  In addition, when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) wins, after any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) ends, any operation of the player except for the payment of credits Is also disabled and controlled to a frozen state in which the game cannot be progressed for a certain period of time. In addition, when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is completed when the stop function is set to be effective, any operation of the player is invalid except for the payment of the credit, and the game Control is performed until the reset / setting switch 38 is operated to a stop state where the advancement is disabled.

  In addition, after any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is ended, the gaming state is controlled to RT1 until an end condition predetermined for each type of the ended big bonus is satisfied. Ending conditions include winning a big bonus or playing a specified number of games (70 times after the end of the big bonus (1), 50 times after the end of the big bonus (2), and after the end of the big bonus (3) 30 times).

  Even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won in the internal lottery to be described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated at an appropriate timing to be able to win these roles, You will not win any of these roles. This is because the symbols constituting each of the big bonuses (1) to (3) are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. However, if the winning combination has not been won because the player has not been operated at an appropriate timing, a predetermined chance (in terms of winning) may be derived.

  On the other hand, replays (1) to (4) other than big bonuses (1) to (3), orange, plum, watermelon, 1 sheet (1) to (3), black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry, which will be described later, When Bell wins in the internal lottery to be described later, the symbols constituting these roles are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, so in principle, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated. It is possible to win regardless of the timing.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state, either RT1 or RT2, the big bonuses (1) to (3) are each one of orange, plum, and watermelon and one (1) to (1) ( 3) may be read out as a lottery target at the same time in the internal lottery. Therefore, when a plurality of winning combinations are read out simultaneously as a lottery target combination and won, either one of the read big bonus, orange, plum or watermelon and one (1) to (3) You will win both of them.

  Note that “+” and “˜” are written between winning combinations to indicate that they are simultaneously read out as a lottery target combination in the internal lottery. For example, the notation of big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) indicates that the big bonus (1), orange, and one (1) are simultaneously read out as the lottery target in the internal lottery. .

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (2) is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines. Replay (4) is awarded when a combination of “replay-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines. As described above, in principle, the replays (1) to (4) can be awarded regardless of the timing at which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. When winning a replay, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of wagers again, so three medals corresponding to the number of bets 3 that are not required to be set in the next game are paid out. This is essentially the same as.

  When any one of the replays (2) to (4) wins, the gaming state is controlled at RT2 until a termination condition predetermined for each type of replay won. Ending conditions are to win a big bonus or to play a specified number of games (200 after replay (2), 150 after replay (3), 100 after replay (4)) It is established by.

  Replays (2) to (4) are drawn with a higher probability than in the initial gaming state when RT1 is won with a high probability for replay (1). For this reason, even if the replays (2) to (4) are won and won, it is easy for the player to misunderstand that the player has only won the replay. Further, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. For this reason, even if it is specified by the player that the replay prize is different from the replay (1), it can be difficult to understand which of the replays (2) to (4) is won. It can be made easier. As a result, even when the player is awarded one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlled by RT2 during RT1, it can be difficult to understand that the control is performed by RT2. Even if it is specified that the game is controlled by RT2, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many games RT2 are controlled by. For this reason, it is possible to obscure the number of end games of a series of RTs.

  The black cherry is awarded when the symbol “black cherry” is derived to one of the winning lines for the reel 2L. The net cherry is awarded when the symbol “net cherry” is derived to one of the winning lines for the reel 2L. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the reel 2L.

  The symbols ("black cherry", "net cherry", and "white cherry") of the reel 2L constituting each of the black cherry, the net cherry, and the white cherry are not arranged within 5 frames on the reel 2L. Therefore, even if one of the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries is won in the internal lottery, if the stop switch 8L is not operated at an appropriate timing to make a winning combination possible, the black The symbol of the reel 2L constituting each of the cherry, net cherry and white cherry cannot be stopped on the winning line. Therefore, each black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry can be said to be a winning combination if the stop switch 8L is operated at an appropriate timing enabling winning of the winning single bonus role. It can be said that a winning can be avoided by operating. When winning, one medal will be paid out.

  When the symbols “black cherry”, “net cherry”, or “white cherry” are stopped at the upper or lower stage of the left reel 2L, the two winning lines L2, L4 or the winning lines L3, L5 are used. A combination of black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries is prepared, and black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries are won on two winning lines, so two medals are paid out.

  Orange is awarded when the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The plum is awarded when a combination of “plum-plum-plum” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged on any winning line, and 15 medals are paid out. The symbols constituting the roles of orange, plum and watermelon are not arranged within 5 frames in each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. For this reason, in principle, the roles of orange, plum, and watermelon cannot be awarded unless the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated at an appropriate timing.

  Bell wins when any combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any winning line, and nine medals are paid out. Since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged within 5 frames on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, in principle, it is possible to win regardless of the timing of operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. .

  One (1) is awarded when a combination of “net 7-white cherry-black cherry” is aligned on any of the winning lines. One (2) is awarded when a combination of “white 7-black cherry-net cherry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. One (3) is awarded when a combination of “black 7-net cherry-white cherry” is arranged on any of the winning lines. When winning, one medal is paid out.

  Reel 2L-2R composing one piece (1)-(3) ("Black 7", "Net 7", "White 7", "Black Cherry", "Net Cherry", "White Cherry") The reels are not arranged within 5 frames. Therefore, as in the case of the big bonuses (1) to (3), with respect to one piece (1) to (3), the stop switch 8L to 8R can be won in one winning combination with the appropriate timing. It can be said that if it is operated, the winning combination can be avoided, and it can be said that the winning can be avoided by operating other than the appropriate timing.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the bonuses in the slot machine 1 are big bonuses (1) to (3) as special roles, and black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, orange, plum, watermelon, and one small role. (1) to (3), the replay (1) to (4) is defined as the replaying role of the bell. In addition, the combinations of the roles in the slot machine 1 are big bonus (1) + orange, big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), big bonus (2) + plum, big bonus (2) + plum + 1. (2) Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon + 1 (3), Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3) .

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, whether the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (1) to RT (2), whether the RT is carrying over the big bonus, or is RB Depending on the combination, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to the lottery are different.

  When the gaming state is the initial gaming state or RT2, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (1) + orange, big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), big Bonus (2) + plum, big bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2), big bonus (3) + watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3), replay (1), black cherry, net Cherry, white cherry, orange, orange + 1 sheet (1), plum, plum + 1 sheet (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet (3), and bell are subject to internal lottery, and are sequentially read out as internal lottery targets.

  When the gaming state is RT1, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (1) + orange, big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), big bonus (2) + Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon +1 (3), Replay (1), Replay (2), Replay (3 ), Replay (4), Black Cherry, Net Cherry, White Cherry, Orange, Orange +1 (1), Plum, Plum +1 (2), Watermelon, Watermelon +1 (3), Bell are subject to internal lottery , And sequentially read out as a target combination of internal lottery. When the gaming state is either the initial gaming state, RT1, or RT2, and one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won and the game is being carried over, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) ), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon + 1 (3) is not read out as a target for internal lottery.

  In addition, when the game state is a regular bonus, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, orange, orange +1 (1), plum, plum +1 (2), watermelon, watermelon +1 (3), bell inside It becomes the object of the lottery and is sequentially read out as the object combination of the internal lottery.

  Next, the internal lottery will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-described winning combination (derivation of a winning display result) is allowed is determined before the display result of the variable display device 2 is derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is operated). , To decide. In the internal lottery, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired from the random number generation circuit 42. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the obtained random numbers for internal lottery and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination such as a small combination and a replay combination, and a special combination with any of the general combination The range of judgment values to be won in combination with roles is specified, and winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general role and a special role are simultaneously won in one game. It can happen. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are subject to the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  The number of determination values acquired in the bonus internal lottery increases as the set value increases. As a result, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special combination in the internal lottery.

  In addition, the probability of winning for replay is set to be higher in RT than in the initial gaming state. For example, “9000” is set as the number of replay determination values, “38000 + 300 × 3 = 38900” when RT1 is set, and “39000” when RT2 is set. .

Note that the probability of winning replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is high when RT1. Specifically, since the winning rate of each of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers control of RT2 is RT1, “300” is specified as the number of determination values, so 300 / 65536≈ 0.00457. Therefore, the probability of winning in one of the replays (2) to (4) during RT1 controlled after the end of the big bonus (1) and controlling to RT2 is 1- [1- (0.00457 × 3) ] ⁷⁰ ≈ 62%. In addition, the probability of winning in any one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlling to RT2 during RT1 controlled after the end of the big bonus (2) is 1- [1- (0.00457 × 3) ] ⁵⁰ ≈ 50%. In addition, the probability of winning in any one of the replays (2) to (4) and controlling to RT2 during RT1 controlled after the end of the big bonus (3) is 1- [1- (0.00457 × 3) ] a ³⁰ ≒ 34%.

  In the present embodiment, after the big bonuses (1) to (3) are finished, the main CPU 41a has the same special lottery and small lottery probabilities as in the normal gaming state, but the replay winning probabilities are both higher than those in the initial gaming state. RT1 with a high probability, and the medal payout rate per game (the winning probability of the target combination × the total value of the payout number / the number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1. RT1 does not win any special role, and does not win any of the replays (2) to (4). In this embodiment, the RT1 is 70 after the end of the big bonus (1). 50 games if the game, big bonus (2) is over, 30 games if the big bonus (3) is finished) or winning one of the replays (2) to (4) The process is terminated by shifting to RT2 or winning a special role.

  Further, when winning at any one of the replays (2) to (4) at RT1, the lottery probabilities for the special combination (when no special combination is carried over) and the small combination are the same as in the initial game state. The winning probability of replay (1) is higher than that in the normal gaming state and RT1, and the medal payout rate per game is controlled to RT2 exceeding 1. RT2 does not win any special role, and the specified number of games (in this embodiment, 200 games after winning Replay (1), 150 games after winning Replay (2), The game is ended by reaching 100 special games after winning the replay (3) or by winning any special role before reaching the prescribed number of games.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after completion of the big bonuses (1) to (3), the control is performed to RT1 in which the winning probability of the replays (2) to (4) serving as a trigger for transition to RT2 is increased. Therefore, the player's expectation to shift to RT2 can be enhanced by being controlled by RT1.

  RT2 has a larger number of default games than RT1 and can be expected to win more medals than RT1, so the player's expectation to move to RT2 is controlled by RT1. The feeling can be further enhanced.

  In addition, RT1 and RT2 will receive a special role if they win, even if one of the special roles is won before reaching the specified number of games after the start of the RT. If RT does not end and the winning special role is not awarded, it will be possible to continue to control the RT until the specified number of games is reached. If the selected special combination is not won, the RT can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, and the player is not given a sense of loss.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over from the next game until the special role wins, it is possible to win the special role won during that time after the RT reaches the specified number of games Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT.

  Further, the number of determination values of each lottery target acquired in the internal lottery when the game state is a regular bonus is the largest for the bell. Thereby, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the bell in the internal lottery when it is a regular bonus.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combinations or combinations determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of frames to be drawn according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the stop status of the reels and the stop position of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of frames to be pulled in at each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) per reel are defined, and these areas are set to 0 to 20 (see FIG. 3) is assigned.

  On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number has a stop reference position (in this embodiment, a perspective window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stop control table for the unreacted reel corresponding to the stop reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. .

  If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the winning combination is drawn not to be aligned on the winning line. Create a stop control table with the number of frames to be drawn in and perform reel stop control. If none of the roles are won, stop control with a number of frames to be drawn that does not match any of the roles A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. If the winning combination is not drawn, it will be controlled so that it can be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, such as when a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from the previous game or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected (Big Bonus ( 1) + Orange, Big Bonus + Bell, etc.), the number of draws is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line, and the winning special role is the winning line. For stop operation positions that cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames, a stop control table with a number of drawn frames is created so that the selected small role can be drawn into the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum. The stop control is performed. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you can't withdraw a special role that is elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can align and stop the small roles that are elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, Control is performed to align and stop them, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn simultaneously, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  When a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (such as a big bonus (1) + replay (1)), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from the previous game Then, a stop control table in which the number of draw-in frames is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In addition, as will be described later, “replay” and “bell”, which are symbols constituting the re-gamer, are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, since it can be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L by the player, Regardless of the operation timing of 8C and 8R, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special role and the replaying role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the replaying role is drawn in, and the special role is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the replaying role.

  When multiple types of small roles are elected at the same time (Orange + 1 (1), etc.), the small number with the number of payouts out of the selected small roles will be drawn to the winning line to the maximum in the range of 4 frames In the stop operation position where a small number of winning small roles with a large number of payouts cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the number of paying out of the selected small roles A stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that a small role with a small number is drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a small combination with a large number of payouts can be stopped among the selected small combinations that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, If control is performed to stop them together and the winning combination with a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line cannot be withdrawn, the winning portion with a maximum payout number cannot be drawn. If it is possible to align and stop small combinations with a small number of payouts among the selected small combinations, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the non-winning combination is stopped in the pull-in range of 4 frames. Control will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, so that a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  Special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously, such as when multiple types of small roles are elected while special roles are carried over from before the previous game, or when special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously. If it is (Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), etc.), the number of draws will be determined so that the winning special role will be drawn to the maximum of 4 frames in the winning line. As for the stop operation position where the special role cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the winning small role with a large number of payouts will be drawn into the winning line so that it will be drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames. There is a number of frames, and the selected special roles and the small roles with a large number of payouts among the selected small roles will not be able to be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames. Small number of payouts Create a stop control table number pull frame is defined to draw the maximum extent of 4 frames the winning line small combination, performing stop control of the reels. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you cannot pull in a special role that has been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, arrange a small role with a large number of payouts out of the winning roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, they will be controlled to stop them together, and special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 tops on the winning line will not be able to withdraw those with a large number of payouts. If a small combination with a small number of payouts can be stopped on the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, a control is performed to stop the combination and stop it. The role is 4 So that the control for removing Te stopped at pull-in range of Ma is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it becomes possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It is possible to win a prize. In the case where a special role and a small role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the special role is withdrawn and the special role and the small role are not aligned on the winning line. Are drawn only with small payouts with a large number of payouts, so that a plurality of types of small roles are not arranged on the winning line at the same time.

  As in the present embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, a stop operation is performed at the timing when the drawing pattern of the selected special role and the constituent symbol of the selected small role overlap. In such a case, if the control for drawing in the special symbol is given priority over the small symbol, the special symbol is not drawn and the small symbol is drawn, and the small character is awarded a prize. In such a case, the winning of the special role that may be won simultaneously will be denied, and even if a small role that may win simultaneously is won, it will be impossible to expect the winning of the special role . On the other hand, if a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, the constituent symbols of the special role will be drawn in preference to the constituent symbols of the small role, and the selected small role will be missed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for all reels, a display mode in which the “orange” symbol stops on any winning line and a “black 7” symbol on any winning line. The display mode that stops on top, the display mode that the “Plum” symbol stops on any winning line, the display mode that the “Net 7” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel, and the “Watermelon” symbol The display mode that stops on one of the winning lines and the display mode that stops the “white 7” symbol on any of the winning lines are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which is the maximum drawing range, and the “orange” symbol Stop operation position that can aim simultaneously with "Black 7" design, stop operation position that can aim simultaneously with "Plum" design and "Net 7" design, an array where there is no stop operation position that can aim simultaneously with "Watermelon" design and "White 7" design When You have me.

  For the left reel, a display mode in which the “black 7” symbol stops on any winning line, a display mode in which the “net 7” symbol stops on any winning line, or a “white 7” symbol The display mode that stops on the winning line is arranged to exceed the maximum draw range of 4 frames, and the “black cherry” symbol for the middle and right reels stops on one of the winning lines A mode, a display mode in which the “net cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines, and a display mode in which the “white cherry” symbol stops on any of the winning lines, each of which is the maximum drawing range. The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position at which one (1) configuration symbol, one (2) configuration symbol, and one (3) configuration symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  And in the internal lottery, big bonus (1) + orange, big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), big bonus (2) + plum, big bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2), big bonus ( 3) + watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3), that is, only special roles and small roles that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time can be elected simultaneously, and there are stop operation positions that can be aimed at the same time Special roles and small roles are not won at the same time.

  For this reason, even if a small role that could be won at the same time wins, the special role won't be denied, and when a small role that might win at the same time wins, It is possible to increase the expectation for winning. In addition, special roles and small roles that have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time are not won at the same time. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by winning the special combination and the small combination at the same time without missing the selected small combination due to being drawn.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the display mode in which the “orange” symbol stops on any winning line and the “plum” symbol stops on any winning line as shown in FIG. And the display mode in which the “watermelon” symbol stops on one of the winning lines, and the “black 7” symbol is placed on the left reel. A display mode that stops on any of the pay lines, a display mode that stops the “net 7” symbol on any of the pay lines, and a display mode that stops the “white 7” symbol on any of the pay lines , Each of which exceeds the maximum draw range of 4 frames, and the display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol stops on any winning line for the middle and right reels, and the “net cherry” symbol is either The display mode that stops on the prize line and the display mode that the “white cherry” symbol stops on any of the winning lines are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which is the maximum drawing range, and the “orange” symbol There is no stop operation position that can target the “Plum” symbol and the “Watermelon” symbol at the same time, and one (1) component symbol, one (2) component symbol, and one (3) component symbol. The arrangement is such that there are no stop operation positions that can be aimed at the same time.

  In the internal lottery, the big bonus (1) is orange or orange and one (1), the big bonus (2) is plum or plum and one (2), and the big bonus (3) is watermelon or watermelon and 1 Each of the sheets (3) can be won simultaneously. In other words, each of the big bonuses (1) to (3) has orange, plum, watermelon, or orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), watermelon + 1, each having a symbol that does not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at simultaneously. Since it is possible to win simultaneously with the number of cards (3), even if none of the small roles that could be won at the same time won, it may have missed other small roles, so orange, plum, Even in a game in which none of the watermelons, one (1) to (3) wins, it is possible to make the expectation of winning the special role.

  In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a small combination alone is different from the reel stop control pattern used when simultaneously winning a small combination and a special combination. However, since the stopping mode when a small role alone is elected and the stopping mode when a small role and a special role are simultaneously selected are different, the special mode is specially selected according to the stopping mode. There is a problem that the player can determine whether or not the winning combination is won and the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, and “orange-orange-orange” When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, control is performed to align the “orange-orange-orange” combination in the winning line. Orange, big bonus (1) + orange Is selected, among the stop operation positions where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is used as the winning line L1, L2, L3. The stop operation position that can be aligned only with and the stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the pay lines L1 to L5 When the stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned only with the winning lines L4 and L5. It is possible to perform control to align the “orange-orange-orange” combination with the winning lines L4, L5 only when the stopping operation is performed at the stopping operation position where the winning lines L1, L2, L3 cannot be aligned. On the other hand, if orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are selected, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line Stops where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” in the stop operation positions can be aligned only to the winning lines L4 and L5 When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of the work position and the winning lines L1 to L5, control is performed to align the combination of “orange-orange-orange” with the winning lines L4 and L5. The combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and only when the stop operation is performed at the stopping operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. Control is performed to align the combination of “-orange-orange” to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  That is, when orange and big bonus (1) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, “orange- The orange-orange combination is prioritized over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5, and orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) When the winning operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is selected as the winning line L1, L2. , L3 is controlled with priority over the winning lines L4 and L5.

  Similarly, when the plum, big bonus (2) + plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “plum-plum-plum” can be drawn into the winning line, Plum-Plum "combination is controlled in preference to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 over the winning lines L4 and L5. Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) When a winning operation is performed and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “plum-plum-plum” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “plum-plum-plum” is set to the winning lines L1, L2. , The control to align the winning lines L4 and L5 with priority over L3, and the watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon are selected. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “car-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is more than the winning lines L4, L5. Priority is given to L3, and watermelon + 1 (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3) are selected, and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is drawn into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the player can perform the operation, control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3. ing.

  Therefore, if Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon are selected, “Orange-Orange-Orange”, “ The combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is highly likely to be on the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) Plum + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon + 1 (3) There is a high possibility that the combinations of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5. In other words, Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon wins, Orange, Plum, Watermelon wins, Orange +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3), Big Bonus (3) When + watermelon + 1 (3) is won, orange, plum, watermelon won, and “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” The winning lines that are easy to match are different.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, orange + big bonus (1) + orange bonus + 1 (1) than the ratio of orange winning probability to the total value of orange winning probability + orange (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 bonus (1) + orange + big bonus (1) + orange with a probability that the ratio of winning bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) will be higher , Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1). Similarly, Plum + Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 2) Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), with a probability that the winning probability ratio of Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) in the total value of the winning probability of 2) We draw lots of big bonus (2) + plum + 1 sheet (2), and the ratio of winning probability of big watermelon (3) + watermelon to the total value of winning probability of watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon Probability that the ratio of winning probability of big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) to the total value of winning probability of watermelon + 1 sheet (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) will be higher Te watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon, +1 sheets watermelon (3), has carried out a lottery of big bonus (3) + +1 Like Watermelon (3).

  As a result, when the orange and one (1) of the orange and one (1) are won separately, the orange and one (1) are won at the same time as the big bonus (1). The ratio of winning a prize with a big bonus (2) is better when both a plum and one (2) are winning at the same time than when a plum and one (2) are winning alone. If the watermelon and one piece (3) are elected at the same time than the case where the watermelon is elected alone among the watermelon and one piece (3), the big bonus (3) Since the winning percentage will increase at the same time, the winning lines with the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Plum-Plum”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” are the winning lines L1, L2. L3 Or, whether the pay line L4, L5, by can have a change in the player's expectation for winning a special role.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line including the combination of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3, the winning line L4, Even if it is L5, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a special role has been won in both cases, but it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from the winning line where the roles are aligned. Regardless of which winning line is arranged, the player's expectation that the special role is won will not be lost.

  In this embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon are won, and “orange-orange-orange” When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “plum-plum-plum” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, “orange-orange-orange” “plum-plum-plum” "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" combination is controlled to align with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2), big bonus (2) + plum +1 (2), watermelon +1 (3), big bonus (3 + Watermelon + 1 sheet (3) is selected and stops at the stop operation position where the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange” “Plum-Plum-Plum” “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line When the operation is performed, the combination of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. It is designed to control orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon. Stop operation that can draw the combination of “Orange”, “Plum-Plum-Plum” and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” into the winning line When the stop operation is performed at the position, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the combination of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is adjusted to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 only, orange + 1 (1), big Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon +1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon +1 (3) ) Is selected and the combination of "Orange-Orange-Orange", "Plum-Plum-Plum", "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a possible stop operation position, control is performed so that the combination of “orange-orange-orange”, “plum-plum-plum”, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned only to the winning lines L4 and L5. It may be.

  In this embodiment, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the big bonus (1) + orange winning probability to the total value of the winning probability of orange, big bonus (1) + orange, and orange + 1 (1), big Bonus (1) + orange + 1 bonus (1) Big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) winning probability is different from orange and big bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) lottery, Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange is elected, "Orange-Orange-Orange" When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + oren +1 (1) is selected, and the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling in this way, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be changed by the difference in the winning line with the combination of “orange-orange-orange”. In the lottery, the ratio of winning probability of big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) to the total value of winning probability of orange, big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), orange + 1 (1), The ratio of the big bonus (1) + orange winning probability to the total value of the big bonus (1) + orange winning probability is different from the orange, Gottbon (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) are drawn, Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) are selected , “Orange-orange-orange” combination is stopped at the stop operation position where it can be drawn into the winning line, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange is won , By controlling the winning line to be preferentially aligned with the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” can be drawn into the winning line, and “orange- The player's expectation of winning the special role may vary depending on the winning line with the combination of “Orange-Orange”. . Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Watermelon +1 (3), Big The same applies to the case of bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3).

  In the present embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon are won and orange, plum, watermelon are selected as will be described later. If the player misses the game, the control is performed to align the winning lines with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1 ), Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon +1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon +1 (3) won, Orange, Plum, Watermelon If the player misses the game, the control is performed to align the chance line with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Even if a plum or watermelon is missed, it is possible to determine the difference in the possibility of winning a special role, but the ratio of chance chances to be on the winning lines L1, L2, L3, the chance chance is L4, If the proportion of L5 is orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon is won and orange, plum, watermelon is lost, Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3), Big Bonus ( 3) + Watermelon + 1 sheet (3) may be controlled to be equal to the case where the orange, plum, and watermelon are missed. When J, Plum, and Watermelon win, the difference in the possibility of winning a special role can be determined, whereas when orange, plum, and watermelon are missed, the possibility of winning a special role is suggested. However, since it becomes impossible to determine the difference in the winning possibility, it becomes possible to enhance the interest when playing the game without missing the orange, plum, and watermelon.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying that when a small role is won. Since the small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is elected than when the special role is not elected, the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  In addition, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of the selected small type notification effects when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, the second small role announcement effect is selected when orange and one (1) are elected at the same time than when orange and one (1) are elected alone. The ratio is high, and the second small role announcement effect is selected when the plum and one (2) of the plum and one (2) are won at the same time than when the plum and one (2) are won at the same time If the watermelon and one piece (3) are elected at the same time than the case where the watermelon is elected alone among the watermelon and one piece (3), the second small role announcement effect Since the ratio of “Orange”, “Plum”, and “Watermelon” is selected, a special prize line with a combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Plum-Plum”, and “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is available. The possibility of winning a role, the type of small role announcement production, Link, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role by directing the display mode of these reels.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. When the special role is won, the ratio at which the third stop is selected is Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it is likely that the player is most likely to win the special role when starting from the third stop. It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  Also, when the orange and one sheet (1) are elected at the same time, it is selected when the third stop and the second stop are selected than when the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. When the third stop, the second is the case where the plum and one piece (2) are won at the same time than the case where the plum and one piece (2) are won alone. The ratio of selection at the time of stop is high, and the third stop is when watermelon and one piece (3) are won at the same time than when watermelon is won alone among watermelon and one piece (3) Since the ratio of the time when the second stop is selected is high, the combination of “Orange-Orange-Orange”, “Plum-Plum-Plum”, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is selected when winning Orange, Plum, and Watermelon. Possibility of winning a special role with a complete winning line and small role announcement And start timing, but the link, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role by the start timing of the effect and the display mode of these reels.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you miss any part, if you do not win any of the winning combinations, you can change the stop mode of the reel by stopping the specific stop mode that will not stop, but stop at the same timing There is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when a specific combination is missed by performing an operation, and there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when orange and big bonus (1) + orange are selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line, A combination of "Orange / Plum / Watermelon-Orange / Plum / Watermelon-Orange / Plum / Watermelon" except "Orange-Orange-Orange", "Plum-Plum-Plum" and "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" ) Is given priority over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5, and orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are selected. , When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “orange-orange-orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line Eyes pay lines L1, L2, L3 than and performs a control to align in preference to pay line L4, L5.

  Similarly, if the Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” cannot be drawn into the winning line, the Watermelon, Big Bonus (3 ) + Watermelon is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line, the winning line L1 is more than the winning line L4, L5. , L2 and L3 are preferentially aligned, plum + 1 (2), big bonus (2) + plum + 1 (2) are selected, and the combination of “Plum-Plum-Plum” is the winning line If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be pulled in, watermelon + 1 sheet (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) are selected, -When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon" cannot be drawn into the winning line, control is performed so that the chance line is preferentially aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3. It has become.

  For this reason, even when orange and big bonus (1) + orange are won, or when orange + 1 (1) and big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are won, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the orange-orange-orange combination can be drawn into the winning line, the orange-orange-orange combination is aligned with the winning line. If the bonus (1) + orange is won, that is, if only one orange (1) is won and the orange is missed, the chance is placed on the winning lines L1, L2, L3. If there is a high probability of matching, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), that is, orange, 1 ( ) When both have missed the orange and winning at the same time, the chance eyes is likely to align to the winning line L4, L5. Similarly, when Plum and Big Bonus (2) + Plum are won, Plum + 1 (2) and Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2) are also won. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the “Plum-Plum-Plum” combination can be drawn into the winning line, both the “Plum-Plum-Plum” combination is aligned with the winning line, and the watermelon and big bonus (3) Even if + watermelon is won, even if watermelon + 1 piece (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 piece (3) is won, “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line, both “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combinations are aligned on the winning line, but the plum and big bonus (2) If the plum is won, that is, the plum, only one of the two (2) is won by itself, and if the plum is missed, the watermelon, the big bonus (3) + watermelon is won, that is, the watermelon If only one watermelon out of one (3) wins alone and misses the watermelon, chances are high that the winning lines will be on the winning lines L1, L2, L3, plum + 1 (2), big bonus If (2) + plum + 1 (2) is elected, that is, if both the plum and 1 (2) are elected and lose the plum at the same time, watermelon + 1 (3), big bonus (3) If + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) is elected, that is, if both watermelon and 1 sheet (3) are elected at the same time and miss the watermelon, chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5 High sex.

  As a result, when Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon is elected and Orange, Plum, Watermelon is overlooked, Orange +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon +1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Since the winning line where the chances are easy to match is different from when the watermelon + 1 (3) is won and the orange, plum, and watermelon are missed, the reel stop mode when orange, plum, and watermelon are missed is diversified can do.

  The chances were that Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon were won and Orange, Plum, and Watermelon were missed, Orange +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange +1 (1), Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon +1 (3), Big Bonus (3 ) + Watermelon + 1 (3) is controlled to be aligned to any of the winning lines on condition that orange, plum, watermelon has been missed, and these roles or combinations of roles are not elected The chances are not aligned with any of the winning lines. For this reason, the possibility of winning a special role is surely suggested by having chance chances on any of the winning lines.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as described above, orange and one sheet (1) are larger when orange and one sheet (1) are simultaneously elected than when orange is elected alone. If the winning percentage is increased at the same time as the bonus (1), and the plum and one (2) are picked at the same time, the plum and one (2) are winning at the same time. The percentage of people who are won at the same time as the big bonus (2) increases, and the watermelon and one piece (3) of the watermelon and one piece (3) are won at the same time than the case where the watermelon is won alone Since the percentage of winning at the same time as the big bonus (3) will increase, whether the winning line with the chance chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. , By the special role winning It is possible to have a change in the player's expectations.

  Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role regardless of which winning line is matched The feeling of expectation is not spoiled.

  In the present embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon is won and orange, plum, watermelon is missed Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1), Plum + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum + 1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3), Big The winning line is easy to match when you win the bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3) and you miss the orange, plum, and watermelon. Set 1 and chance second, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + When a mosquito wins and loses orange, plum, watermelon, orange +1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), big bonus (2) + plum +1 (2), Watermelon + 1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon + 1 (3) wins and oranges, plums, and watermelons are missed. You may make it do.

  Also, in this embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, plum, big bonus (2) + plum, watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon is won and orange, plum, watermelon is missed In addition, control is performed so that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4 and L5, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2), Watermelon +1 (3), Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon +1 (3) are selected and orange, plum and watermelon are lost In addition, control is performed so that the chances are aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3. -Eggplant (1) + Orange, Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + If Watermelon is elected and loses Orange, Plum, Watermelon Control to align only L3, orange +1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange +1 (1), plum +1 (2), big bonus (2) + plum +1 (2), watermelon +1 When winning (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3), and orange, plum, and watermelon are missed, control is performed so that the chances are aligned only to the winning lines L4 and L5. Good.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the big bonus (1) when the orange and one sheet (1) are won at the same time than when the orange and one sheet (1) are won alone. At the same time, the winning percentage is higher, and the Plum and 1 (2) Plum and 1 (2) are winning more than the Plum and 1 (2) are winning simultaneously. 2) The percentage of winning at the same time is high, and the watermelon and one piece (3) of the watermelon and one piece (3) are bigger than the case where the watermelon and one piece (3) are won at the same time. By increasing the winning percentage at the same time as the bonus (3), the winning line where the chances are aligned is the special line depending on whether the winning line is L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. Changes in player expectations for winning For example, when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, the process proceeds to RT described later, and when the chances are aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, When moving to RT and the chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5, the first RT is advantageous (RT termination condition, winning probability of re-playing role, presence / absence of winning type notification or notification rate, etc.) ) May be shifted to a different second RT. By adopting such a configuration, when orange, plum, and watermelon are missed, not only the reel display mode is diversified, but also the same chance. Even if the display mode is aligned with the winning line, there is a possibility of transition when an orange, plum, or watermelon is missed when the orange, plum, or watermelon is selected alone. And an RT that may shift when an orange, plum, or watermelon is missed when an orange + 1 (1), plum + 1 (2), or watermelon + 1 (3) is won The degree can be changed.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you missed a certain role, there is something that suggests that you will miss a specific role by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop if no role is elected, but when you miss a specific role If the player does not know the specific stopping mode to be stopped, he cannot know that he / she has missed the elected special role, and in such a case, he simply missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and at the first stop (all reels change) If one of the reels is stopped), “Plum” or “Watermelon” will be placed on the winning line when the “Orange” is stopped at the stop operating position where it cannot be pulled into the winning line. If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line where “plum” or “watermelon” is stopped in the remaining reels, the “plum” or Control is performed to pull “orange” into the winning line of “watermelon”. Also, Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) will be elected, and "Orange" will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is fluctuating and one of the reels is stopped), the “orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the first stop. Even if it was not possible to stop at the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the second stop time because the stop operation was performed at the operation position, at the time of the third stop (any one reel is changing) Stop operation position in which “orange” can be drawn into the winning line where “orange” was stopped at the time of the first stop. In the case where the stop operation is performed, thereby performing the control to draw "orange" on the pay line has stopped the "orange" when the first stop.

  That is, even if the orange is missed at the time of the first stop or the second stop, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, Control is performed to align a part of the “orange” combination with the winning line.

  In addition, when Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are elected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop , Watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) are elected, and the plum is lost at the first stop and the second stop The same control is performed.

  For this reason, Orange, Big Bonus (1) + Orange, Orange + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + Orange + 1 (1) were elected, and the orange was missed during the 1st stop and the 2nd stop Even when the remaining reels are stopped at the stop operation position where “orange” can be pulled into the winning line, some of the “orange-orange-orange” combinations are aligned with the winning line. Even if the orange is missed at the time of the 1st stop or the 2nd stop, it is easy to determine whether or not the orange is missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning line. Can be determined. In addition, when Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are elected and the Plum is lost at the first stop or the second stop , Watermelon, big bonus (3) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet (3), big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 sheet (3) are elected, and the plum is lost at the first stop and the second stop Has the same effect.

  In the present embodiment, orange, big bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1) are won, and the first stop and the second stop If the orange is missed at the first stop, the pattern will be an index ("Plum" or "Watermelon" if missed at the first stop, "Orange" stopped at the first stop if missed at the second stop) Is regarded as a stop position where “orange” is stopped, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when orange is not missed. Therefore, a stop control table for stopping the combination of “orange-orange-orange” on the winning line, and a combination of “orange-orange-orange” when orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop Since there is no need to prepare a separate stop control table for stopping a part of the winning line on the winning line, the combination of “orange-orange-orange” when orange is missed during the first stop and the second stop The storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced even when control is performed to align a part of the winning line. Also, if Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are won, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Watermelon +1 ( 3) The same applies when the big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3) is won.

  In this embodiment, there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously target `` orange '', `` plum '', `` watermelon '' that may be missed, but for example, `` orange '' that may be missed Both the “Plum” symbols are arranged so that there is a range that can be pulled in, and one of the oranges and plums is won, and after the first and second stops, the constituent symbols of the winning role are missed and the rest When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where both the “orange” and “plum” symbols can be drawn into the winning line, the winning design symbol of “Orange” and “Plum” will be awarded. By stopping at the line, it may be possible to control part of the winning combination to the winning line. By doing so, it did not stop at the winning line. Since winning the role that corresponds to the pattern it is negative, whether the role of dropped is what, it is possible to clearly determine.

  In the present embodiment, when a combination of a combination including orange or orange is won and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “orange” cannot be drawn into the winning line, “plum” or “watermelon” If it is a stop operation position that can pull in, these "Plum" or "Watermelon" is pulled in, but the combination of the combination including orange or orange is won and "Orange" cannot be pulled into the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, even if it is a stop operation position where “plum” or “watermelon” can be drawn, these “plum” or “watermelon” may not be drawn. By doing so, after the first stop or the second stop, the remaining reels are stopped at a stop operation position where “orange” can be drawn into the winning line. Performs operation, some combinations of "orange - - Orange Orange" depending on whether aligned in a winning line, it is possible to clearly determine that missed orange. If a combination of combinations including plums or plums is won, and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “Plum” cannot be pulled into the winning line, a combination of watermelons or combinations including watermelon will be selected and “Watermelon” will be selected. The same applies when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the winning line.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a wins orange, big bonus (1) + orange, orange + 1 (1), big bonus (1) + orange + 1 (1), the orange is displayed at least by the second stop. It is preferable to notify the winner or the possibility. As a result, when the orange is missed at the time of the first stop and the second stop, it is possible to draw “orange” into the winning line for the remaining reels if the fact that the orange has been won or the possibility of this is reported. A stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not the orange has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “orange-orange-orange” is aligned with the winning line. When there are a plurality of roles that do not have stop operation positions that can be pulled in simultaneously, that is, there are a plurality of roles that miss one when aiming at one, it is possible to accurately determine which one has been missed. . Also, if Plum, Big Bonus (2) + Plum, Plum +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Plum +1 (2) are won, Watermelon, Big Bonus (3) + Watermelon, Watermelon +1 ( 3) The same applies when the big bonus (3) + watermelon + 1 (3) is won.

  On the game control board 40 side, the internal lottery is performed as described above, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped according to the result and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a prize is generated. It will be a thing. As a result of winning a prize, a medal is paid out or a game state is transferred as a payout. Thus, depending on the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, an original effect is performed on the effect control board 90 side. It is. In order to perform such an effect, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 must be able to recognize the progress of the game on the game control board 40 side, but is sent from the main CPU 41a of the game control board 40. Various effects are performed based on the above-described commands related to the progress of the game.

  In order to perform the performance, the RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 has various counters, an area for setting various flags, a game state command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, and an internal winning command. Area for storing winning status, combination of display results derived to reels 2L, 2C, 2R, information indicating presence / absence of winning, game state applied in game running on game control board 40 ( The winning situation and the gaming state are also provided in the RAM 91c twice.

  Among the effects executed by the control of the sub-control unit 91, as an effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 based on a command output to the display control circuit 92, a game according to the gaming state and the stage described above There is a production.

  The game effects include the demonstration effects described above, the bonus effects that are executed until the game state is won after the bonus is won, the RT effects that are executed when the game state is controlled by RT1 or RT2, and a predetermined character. Character effects to appear, stage transition effects that change the appearance of the effects including the character effects and the background by shifting the stage, and information that is advantageous to the player involved in winning the role when a predetermined notification condition is met Including a navigation effect and a normal effect performed in the initial gaming state. It should be noted that image element data and moving image data for performing a game effect are stored in the CGROM.

  The RT effect is different from the normal effect (the color of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the appearing character, the sound effect / game sound output from the speakers 53, 54, the lighting pattern of the effect effect LED 52, etc.) Different). Thereby, it can be made easy to make a player recognize that it is controlled by RT.

  It is determined whether or not the character effect is executed according to a predetermined appearance rate. During RT, it is determined whether or not to execute the character effect according to the appearance rate corresponding to the set probability mode among a plurality of probability modes (low accuracy, normal, high accuracy) having different appearance rates. The

  The stage transition effect is performed by switching to a stage selected from a plurality of types of stages according to a predetermined distribution ratio when a predetermined condition described later is satisfied.

  The navigation effect is an effect of notifying the winning winning combination by displaying a character corresponding to the winning combination when any of the small combinations is won. As a navigation effect, for example, an orange character appears when orange is won. Also, a blue character is selected when the plum is selected, a red character is selected when the watermelon is selected, a yellow character is selected when the bell is selected, and a black character is selected when the black cherry is selected. When the net cherry is won, a striped character appears, and when the white cherry is won, a white character appears. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the type of the small role that is won from the appearing character.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a of the effect control board 90 performs a history display effect in which a predetermined game history stored in the RAM 91c is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 based on the player's operation on the touch panel. In the history display effect, the game history is not simply displayed as information, but the sub CPU 91a further performs an operation for advancing the game for a predetermined period or longer (however, the reel 2L). 2C and 2R except for the case where the game is from the start to the stop of the rotation), the liquid crystal display 51 performs a predetermined demonstration effect. The history display effect and the demonstration effect are performed during a period in which the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is not in progress.

  These effects are controlled and executed by the VDP 141 of the display control circuit 92 by outputting an effect data write command, an effect start command, an end command, and the like to the display control circuit 92. When the VDP 141 receives the effect data write command, the VDP 141 reads the effect data corresponding to the command from the CGROM 142 and writes it in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155. When an effect start command is received, if effect data is written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155, it is written by the drawing circuit 154 frame by frame in each frame period until the effect end command is received. The image data corresponding to the effect data is expanded in the frame buffer memory 156 and output to the liquid crystal display 51 by the display circuit 157.

  Data for causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display an effect image under the control of the VDP 141 is stored in advance in the CGROM as effect data. The effect data is prepared for each of a plurality of types of stages, and the effect data written in the effect data area of the temporary storage memory 155 based on the write command from the sub-control unit 91 corresponds to the stage at that time. Will be. Further, the effect data of the history display effect and the effect data of the demonstration effect are stored in the CGROM in advance.

  Further, in the effect control board 90, a stop symbol table for determining the display result of the variable display device 2 based on the reel stop command is provided in the RAM 91c. However, since the reel stop command includes only the type of the stopped reel and the number of the symbol stopped in the middle as information, it is not possible to determine what symbol is stopped by this alone. For this reason, the ROM 91b stores in advance a table showing all symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With reference to this table, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped on the stop symbol table. The symbol is registered. The sub-control unit 91 produces an effect based on the registration information of the stop symbol table.

  Next, a process executed by the main control unit 41 and a process executed by the sub control unit 91 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the slot machine 1, the game is progressed by repeatedly performing the game process one game at a time. For this purpose, the game must be in a state where the game can be progressed first. In order to be able to advance the game, for example, the set value work is stored in the set value work with the set value in the normal range with the main control unit 41 including the main CPU 41a activated, and the data stored in the RAM 41c. The condition is that there is no abnormality. When the game is ready to proceed, game processing is repeated in the slot machine 1 game by game. Hereinafter, each game in the slot machine 1 will be described. The “game” in the slot machine 1 is, in a narrow sense, a period from when the start switch 7 is operated to when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  The game control process is also executed after the power is turned on and a predetermined boot process is performed, or immediately after the setting is changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. When processing of one game is started, first, the number of bets is set by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 or by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 4, and operating the start switch 7. A BET process for instructing the substantial start of the game is performed. If the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same number of bets as in the previous game (3 in this embodiment) is automatically set by the flag during the replay game (the flag during the replay game is deleted at this stage) ).

  When the number of bets is set by BET processing and the start switch 7 is operated, a random number for internal lottery is extracted, and winnings for each combination determined according to the gaming state are allowed based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to do so. In the lottery process, an internal winning command indicating the setting status of the winning flag in the RAM 41c is transmitted to the effect control board 90.

  When the lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed next. In the reel rotation process, the reel motor is operated on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game. 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 333SL, 33SC, 33SR after the rotation speed reaches a constant speed) from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is satisfied, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R Is enabled. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started and stopped, a reel rotation command and a reel stop command are transmitted to the effect control board 90, respectively.

  When the driving of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, a winning determination process is performed for determining whether any of the above-mentioned role symbols is derived and displayed on the winning line in the display result at the time of stopping. If it is determined in this winning determination process that any combination has been won, various processes corresponding to the winnings generated on the game control board 40 are performed. Here, a winning determination command indicating a winning determination result is sent to the effect control board 90. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) has been won, the corresponding gaming state is controlled.

  In the winning determination process, when it is determined that one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the corresponding RT counter is reset and the RT is terminated. And controlled by a big bonus. For this reason, even if one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won during RT1 or RT2, the RT is not terminated and the big bonus is won or the prescribed number of games is consumed. Continue until

  Also, in the winning determination process, when it is determined that any one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won, the RT counter of RT1 is reset and RT1 is terminated, and the rule according to the type of replay that has won RT2 is controlled by setting the number of games in the RT counter of RT2.

  When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, medals are paid out or credits are added according to the number of payouts set in the winning determination process. However, when the number of credits accumulated as data reaches 50, the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out an excess number of medals from the medal payout opening 9. When RT1 or RT2 is in progress, the number of remaining games in RT is decremented by 1 in the payout process, and when it becomes 0, the RT is terminated. In addition, various processes not related to winning (for example, a process related to the end control of the big bonus, and the elimination of a winning flag (a winning flag such as a small role) without carryover) are also performed. In the payout process, the winning flags of the big bonuses (1) to (3) stored in the special work are not erased. Thereby, the winning flags of the big bonuses (1) to (3) are carried over to the next game. If it is determined that the big bonus has ended as a result of the payout process in the payout process, the specified number of games corresponding to the type of the ended big bonus is set in the RT counter to control RT1. At the end of the payout process, that is, at the end of one game, a game state command indicating the game state of the next game is sent to the effect control board 90. Then, the process for one game ends, and the process for the next one game starts.

  In the repetition of the game as described above, the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 shifts the game state between the initial game state, RT1, RT2, and the big bonus, and commands according to the progress of the game. Is transmitted to the effect control board 90. In contrast, the sub-control unit 91 of the effect control board 90 performs an original effect based on the command received from the game control board 40.

  Next, processing executed by the sub control unit 91 will be described. The sub-control unit 91 first executes a predetermined effect initial setting process, and after performing an effect control restoration process for restoring the control state in the effect control board 90 to the state when the power supply is stopped, the effect-side random value Repeat the update process.

  In the sub-control unit 91, an interrupt for controlling the progress of the effect is generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the timer interrupt flag of the RAM 91c is set to the ON state by the reset / interrupt controller. Then, the effect control interruption process is executed. In the effect control interrupt process, the contents of the internal register are saved, the effect backup process is executed, and when the sub control unit 91 is restarted, the data required for restoring the control state before the restart is backed up. Is done. Further, command analysis processing for analyzing various commands transmitted from the game control board 40 is executed, and predetermined effect control processing is executed. By this effect control process, various effects such as displaying an image on the liquid crystal display 51 and generating sound from the speakers 53 and 54 according to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 are performed. In addition, various random values counted by a random number circuit (not shown) or the like are updated on the side of the effect control board 90, and then the contents of the saved register are restored, and then the effect control interrupt process ends. In the effect control process executed in the effect control interrupt process, the sub-control unit 91 performs a game effect execution process for executing the above-described game effect according to the game state or the like.

  Of the game effects performed by the sub-control unit 91, the RT effect is an effect executed when the game state is controlled to RT1 or RT2. The RT effect may be a common effect so that it is difficult for the player to specify the conditions that triggered the RT (for example, the type of big bonus that ended and the type of replay that won the prize) The effect may be selected at random regardless of the conditions that trigger the RT. Thereby, it can be made difficult to specify how many times the specified number of games has been controlled by the RT effect.

  Next, a character effect and a stage transition effect among the game effects performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be specifically described. First, the character effect will be described. The sub-control unit 91 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the character effect according to the appearance rate specified from the probability mode. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs a process of determining the probability mode according to the distribution rate according to the game state during RT.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a character effect execution determination table used when determining whether or not to execute a character effect. The appearance ratio of the character effect is 10% when the probability mode is low accuracy, 20% when normal, and 50% when normal, and the probability value is 50% when high. It has been. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the character effect is executed when the probability mode is highly accurate. On the other hand, the character effect execution frequency generally decreases in ascending order. As a result, it is possible to add interest to the game such as allowing the player to predict the current probability mode from the frequency of character effects.

  Further, the probability mode for specifying the appearance rate of the character effect is determined according to a different distribution rate according to the game state during RT. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a probability mode determination table used when determining a probability mode.

  When the game state during RT is a specific state when the number of remaining games up to the controlled number of controlled RT games reaches 20 games or when a big bonus is won, the probability mode has a low probability. It is determined with a probability of 20%, normally with a probability of 20%, and with a probability of 60%.

  When the number of remaining games up to the controlled number of controlled RT games is 20 games during RT, for example, the number of remaining games is 20 without being controlled by RT2 after being controlled by RT1. When it becomes a game, if it is controlled by RT2 while it is controlled by RT1, the remaining number of games in RT1 when there is no control to RT2 is 20 games, and it is controlled by RT1 If it is controlled to RT2 while it is being played, it means that the remaining number of games in the RT2 has become 20 games.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a non-specific state different from the specific state, the probability mode is determined with a low probability of 35%, a normal probability of 35%, and a high probability of 30%. .

  As described above, when the game state is the specific state, the probability mode can be controlled with a higher probability than when the game state is the non-specific state. As a result, the game state is specified when the frequency of the character effects is high (for example, when the probability mode is highly accurate) than when the frequency is low (for example, when the probability mode is normal or low). It is possible to make the player indirectly recognize that there is a high possibility of being in a state. Therefore, depending on the frequency of execution of the character effect, the player's sense of tension and the player's expectation that the player will win the big bonus will be different when the remaining number of RT games is reduced. Can improve the interest of the game.

  The tables shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 are stored in the ROM 91b of the sub-control unit 91. Based on the program stored in the ROM 91b, the sub-control unit 91 performs the following process as a process for executing the character effect and a process for determining the probability mode.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs a counting process that counts the number of digested games. Also, the sub-control unit 91 performs a determination process for determining whether or not the current game state is the specific state when 10 games are consumed during RT, and refers to the table shown in FIG. 16 in the specific state. Probability mode determination processing for determining the probability mode is performed according to the distribution ratio according to whether or not there is. For this reason, the frequency of character effects can be changed in conjunction with game digestion during RT.

  In the determination process, regardless of whether or not the replays (2) to (4) are won during RT1, the number of games or the number of remaining games digested after the start of RT1 is counted in an identifiable manner. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining games until the number of games of RT1 is exhausted reaches 20 games, thereby determining whether or not the game is in a specific state. In addition, in the determination process, the number of games or the number of remaining games that have been digested since the start of RT2 is counted in an identifiable manner, and the number of games remaining until the prescribed number of games for RT2 is digested based on the result of the counting is 20 games. It is determined whether it is a specific state by determining whether it was.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command indicating winning in one of the winning combinations or replays (2) to (4) for the winning combination simultaneously with the big bonus (hereinafter referred to as BB simultaneous winning winning combination). Sometimes, the above-described probability mode determination process is performed. For this reason, when the frequency of character effects changes irrespective of the number of games, it is possible to improve the expectation that the big bonus is won simultaneously or controlled by RT2. It should be noted that the sub-control unit 91 performs control so that the probability mode does not change without performing the probability mode determination process in a fixed period described later even during RT. Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets normal as the default of the probability mode when control to RT1 is started.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 refers to the table shown in FIG. 15 at the start of the game during RT, and determines whether or not to execute the character effect in the game according to the appearance rate specified from the current probability mode. An effect determination process is performed. When the sub-control unit 91 determines to execute the character effect, the sub-control unit 91 performs a character effect execution process for executing the character effect at a predetermined timing in the game.

  In the present embodiment, the character effect is described as an example as the specific effect. However, the specific effect is not limited to the character effect, but may be an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51 at a predetermined timing, and an effect of outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53 and 54. There may be an effect of lighting the effect LED 52 with a specific lighting pattern. Further, the specific effect is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types are provided, and when the specific effect is determined to be executed, the type to be executed is determined from the plurality of types and the determined type is determined. You may comprise so that a specific production may be performed.

  Next, the stage transition effect will be described. During the RT, the sub-control unit 91 performs a process of determining the type of stage according to the distribution rate that differs depending on the probability mode and the game state. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a stage determination table used when determining a stage to be transferred during RT.

  When the game state is a non-specific state, the table shown in FIG. When the probability mode is low probability, the first stage is determined with a probability of 80%, the second stage with a probability of 10%, and the third stage with a probability of 10%. When the probability mode is normal, the first stage is determined with a probability of 10%, the second stage is determined with a probability of 80%, and the third stage is determined with a probability of 10%. When the probability mode is highly accurate, the first stage is determined with a probability of 10%, the second stage is determined with a probability of 10%, and the third stage is determined with a probability of 80%.

  When the game state is a specific state, the table shown in FIG. When the probability mode is low probability, the second stage is determined with a probability of 20%, and the third stage is determined with a probability of 80%. When the probability mode is normal, the first stage is determined with a probability of 80%, the second stage with a probability of 10%, and the third stage with a probability of 10%. When the probability mode is highly accurate, the first stage is determined with a probability of 10%, the second stage is determined with a probability of 80%, and the third stage is determined with a probability of 10%.

  As a result, when the game state is a non-specific state and the frequency of character effects is low (for example, when the probability mode is normal or low probability), the first stage or the first stage as the stage is more than the third stage. When it is determined with a high probability that the stage will be shifted to the second stage and the character production frequency is high (for example, when the probability mode is high), the stage is shifted to the third stage rather than the first stage or the second stage. It is determined with a high probability.

  Further, when the game state is a specific state and the frequency of character effects is low, it is determined with a high probability that the stage is shifted to the first stage or the third stage as compared to the second stage. When the frequency of is high, it is determined with a high probability that the stage is shifted to the second stage rather than the first stage or the third stage.

  In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the probability mode is determined with a higher probability when the game state is the specific state than when the game state is the non-specific state. Whether or not to execute the character effect is determined according to the appearance rate specified from the controlled probability mode, as described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 17, the type of stage is determined according to a distribution rate that is specified based on whether or not the game state is a specific state and the probability mode.

  As a result, when the game state is a non-specific state, the probability mode is determined as a probability mode with a lower probability or a higher probability than a high probability as shown in FIG. 16, and as shown in FIG. 17 (a). As the stage to be transferred, the first stage or the second stage is determined with a higher probability than the third stage.

  Further, when the game state is a specific state, the probability mode is determined as a probability mode with a low probability or a higher accuracy than normal as shown in FIG. 16, so that the transition is made as shown in FIG. As the stage, the second stage is determined with higher probability than the first stage or the third stage. As a result, the relationship shown in FIG. 18 is considered to hold. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of the prediction based on the combination of the prediction based on the frequency of the character effect and the stage as to whether or not the game state is the specific state.

  When the frequency of the character effect is high, the player can recognize that the game state is more likely to be the specific state than when the frequency of the character effect is low. Moreover, even when the frequency of character effects is high, from the distribution ratio of FIG. 17B, the stage type is more likely to be the second stage than when it is the first stage or the third stage. The player can recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the game state is likely to be the specific state is higher.

  On the other hand, when the frequency of character effects is low, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is more likely to be a non-specific state than when the frequency of character effects is high. Furthermore, even when the frequency of character effects is low, it is more apparent when the stage type is the first stage or the second stage than when the stage type is the third stage, based on the distribution ratio of FIG. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the game state is likely to be a non-specific state is high. In this way, depending on not only the frequency of character effects but also the type of stage, the game with respect to the feeling of tension and big bonus that the player has for the reduced number of remaining RT games The feeling of expectation held by the person can be made different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 17A, the first stage is not selected when the probability mode is low probability. For this reason, when the stage is shifted to the first stage and the frequency of the character effect is very low, the player can recognize that the possibility that the game state is not the specific state but the non-specific state is very high. .

  In addition, during RT, you may comprise so that the judgment criteria of whether it is in a specific state as shown in FIG. 18 may be alert | reported. Thereby, it can be made easier to predict whether or not the player is in a specific state.

  The table shown in FIG. 17 is stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 performs the following process as a process for determining the stage based on the program stored in the ROM 91b.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs determination processing for determining whether or not the current game state is the specific state when 5 games are consumed during RT based on the counting result, and refers to the table shown in FIG. Stage determination processing for determining the stage is performed in accordance with the distribution ratio according to whether the current state is the specific state or the probability mode. Therefore, the stage can be changed in conjunction with game digestion during RT.

  Also, the sub-control unit 91 performs the above-described stage determination process when receiving an internal winning command indicating BB simultaneous winning small combination winning or replay (2) to (4) winning. For this reason, when the stage is shifted regardless of the number of games, it is possible to improve the expectation that the big bonus is simultaneously won or controlled by RT2. Note that, when the probability mode is changed, the sub control unit 91 performs stage determination processing according to the changed probability mode. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so that the stage is not shifted and the stage determination process is not performed in a fixed period described later even during RT. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 sets the first stage as a stage default when control to RT1 is started.

  In the present embodiment, three types of stages have been described as examples. The mode displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 specified from each of the three types of stages may be any mode. For example, from the first stage, a mode of the sea (a background image reminiscent of the sea) The character image of a fish or the like that is displayed and strongly related to the sea is specified), and from the second stage, a mountain mode (a background image reminiscent of the mountain is displayed, and the mountain is highly related (Character images of animals, etc. are displayed), and from the third stage, the aspect of the universe (a background image reminiscent of the universe is displayed, and a character image of planets, etc. that are strongly related to the universe is displayed) May be specified. In this way, since the aspect of the effect based on the character and the background changes depending on the type of stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which stage has been shifted to.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for specifically explaining another stage determination table. The stage in this embodiment is such that when a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) are consumed at a normal time different from during RT, the slot machine is activated and the first game is started, or character effects are produced during RT. It is configured to be changeable when executed. When the slot machine is activated, for example, the second stage is set as a default. Data for specifying the current stage is stored in the RAM 91c.

  FIG. 19A is a diagram for explaining a stage determination table for determining a stage when a predetermined number of games have been consumed in normal times. When the predetermined number of games has been consumed, the stage up with a probability of 20% (for example, transition from the first stage to the second stage, transition from the second stage to the third stage, and no change in the third (highest) stage) ) With a probability of 60% and no change (for example, remains in the nth stage), and a stage down with a probability of 20% (for example, transition from the third stage to the second stage, from the second stage to the second stage) The distribution ratio is set so that the process proceeds to one stage and is determined to be the first (lowest) stage and no change). That is, when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the distribution rate is set so that the probability that the stage is not changed is higher than the probability that the stage is changed.

  FIG. 19B is a diagram for explaining a stage determination table for determining a stage when the slot machine is activated and the first game is started. The stage when the slot machine is activated and the first game is started is determined according to a different distribution ratio according to the set value.

  When the slot machine is activated and the first game is started and the set value is any one of 1 to 3, it is determined to stage up with a probability of 15%, and there is no change with a probability of 50% The distribution ratio is set so that it is determined and stage down is determined with a probability of 35%.

  Also, when the slot machine is activated and the first game is started and the set value is any of 4-6, it is determined to stage up with a probability of 65% and changes with a probability of 10% The distribution ratio is set so that it is determined as “no” and determined as a stage down with a probability of 25%.

  As described above, when the slot machine is activated and the first game is started, the stage is changed with a higher probability than when the predetermined number of games is consumed. Also, when the slot machine is started and the first game is started, it is highly likely that setting values 4 to 6 are set when the stage is up, and setting values 1 to 3 are set when the stage is down. It is possible to cause the player to predict that there is a high possibility that is set.

  FIG. 19C is a diagram for explaining a stage determination table for determining a stage when a character effect is executed during RT. When the character effect is executed during the RT, it is determined based on the probability mode whether it is a stage that further increases the prediction reliability shown in FIG. 18 or a stage different from the stage that further increases the prediction reliability. The stage for further improving the reliability of prediction refers to, for example, the second stage when the set probability mode is highly accurate, and the first stage when the probability mode is normal or low probability. Further, the stage different from the stage for further improving the reliability of prediction means, for example, the third stage different from the second stage when the set probability mode is highly accurate, and the stage different from the second stage when the probability mode is normal or low accurate. A second stage that is different from the first stage.

  Referring to FIG. 19C, when a character effect is executed during RT, the stage is determined as a stage that further increases the reliability of prediction with a probability of 75%, and the reliability of prediction is further increased with a probability of 25%. The distribution ratio is set so that the stage is determined to be different from the stage. That is, when the character effect is executed during RT, the distribution ratio is set so that the possibility of changing the stage becomes extremely high. Further, when the character effect is executed during RT, the stage is shifted to a stage where the reliability of prediction is further increased at a high rate, so that the possibility of causing the player to perform prediction with high reliability can be increased.

  It should be noted that when a character effect is executed during RT, the stage may be determined at a different distribution rate depending on whether or not the game state is a specific state. For example, when a character effect is executed during RT and the game state is a specific state, the stage is determined as a stage that further increases the reliability of prediction with a higher probability than when the game state is a non-specific state. A distribution ratio may be set as described above. As a result, according to the frequency of character production, the type of stage, and the stage changed at the time of character production execution, the player will win the sense of tension and big bonus that the remaining number of games in RT is reduced. This makes it possible to make the player have a different sense of expectation and to further improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the game state is in the specific state, it is possible to increase the possibility of making the player perform a more reliable prediction than in the non-specific state, and the accuracy of the prediction during the specific state is improved. Can be made.

  On the other hand, for example, when a character effect is executed during RT and the game state is a non-specific state, the prediction reliability is higher with a higher probability than when the game state is the specific state. The distribution ratio may be set so as to be determined as a stage that further increases As a result, when the game state is in the non-specific state, it is possible to increase the possibility of causing the player to make a prediction with higher reliability than when the game state is in the specific state. Can be improved.

  The table shown in FIG. 19 is stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 performs the following process as a process for determining the stage based on the program stored in the ROM 91b.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs stage determination processing for determining the stage according to the distribution rate specified from the table shown in FIG. 19A when 50 games are digested based on the counting result.

  Further, when the sub control unit 91 receives a set value command, the sub control unit 91 performs a process for storing the set value data for specifying the currently set set value in the RAM 91c. Thereby, the sub-control part 91 can specify the setting value currently set from the setting value data memorize | stored in RAM91c.

  The sub-control unit 91 can specify any command (for example, a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, or the like) that can specify that an operation for starting a game has been performed by the player after being activated. ) Is determined, and when it is determined that the command has been received, the set value currently set is specified from the set value data stored in the RAM 91c, and is shown in FIG. A stage determination process for determining a stage is performed in accordance with a distribution ratio corresponding to a specified set value among the distribution ratios specified from the table.

  Furthermore, the sub-control unit 91 performs stage determination processing for determining the stage according to the distribution rate specified from the table shown in FIG. 19C when the character effect is executed during RT.

  Next, it will be specifically described whether or not it is in a specific state corresponding to the gaming state and whether or not it is a fixed period in which the probability mode and stage cannot be changed. FIG. 20 is a timing chart for specifically explaining whether or not a specific state is associated with a gaming state and whether or not it is a fixed period. In FIG. 20, the passage of time is indicated by the horizontal axis. In addition, the numbers with circles shown in the lower column in FIG. 20 indicate the timing in each. Hereinafter, the numbers 1 to 8 are simply displayed as numbers.

  Timing 1 indicates the timing at which one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) ends. When it is determined that the big bonus has ended, the RT1 is controlled by setting a predetermined number of games corresponding to the type of the ended big bonus in the RT counter. In FIG. 20, it is assumed that the big bonus (1) is ended and 70 games are set as the prescribed number of games. When it is determined that the big bonus has ended, the effect during the big bonus is ended and the RT effect is started.

  Timing 2 shows the timing when 10 games are consumed after being controlled by RT1. In the present embodiment, RT1 is controlled continuously for at least 30 games in principle. For this reason, immediately after being controlled by RT1, for example, the player predicts even if the probability mode becomes high or the stage is changed from the time when RT1 is controlled until 10 games are consumed. Is very unlikely. As a result, even if the process of making the probability mode highly accurate or the process of changing the stage is performed immediately after being controlled by RT1, it cannot contribute to the enhancement of the fun of the game. For this reason, wasteful processing such as changing the probability mode and the stage by setting the period (timing 1 to timing 2) from the control of RT1 until the game is consumed (timing 1 to timing 2) as the fixed period in which the probability mode and the stage are fixed. It is prevented from being done. On the other hand, the period after the 10 games are digested after being controlled by RT1 (timing 2 to timing 5) is defined as the changeable period during which the probability mode and the stage can be changed, and the process for changing the probability mode and the stage is performed. It is possible to perform the above-described process, and the player can be made to perform the prediction as described above.

  Timing 3 indicates the timing when winning one of the replays (2) to (4) during RT1. When it is determined that one of the replays (2) to (4) has been won, as shown in the column (a), by setting a specified number of games corresponding to the type of replay won in the RT counter, RT1 Is terminated and controlled by RT2. Thus, while the gaming state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, the RT effect started at timing 1 is continuously performed as the RT effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying that one of the replays (2) to (4) is won and controlled by RT2 from the RT effect.

  Timing 5 shows the timing when the specified number of games RT1 is consumed from timing 1, and timing 4 shows the timing when the number of remaining games until the number of specified games is consumed becomes 20 games. That is, the timing 4 to the timing 5 indicate a period in which the game state is the specific state described above, and the probability mode is likely to be highly accurate during this period, so that the frequency of character effects increases. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to predict that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state. In addition, even in the non-specific state from timing 2 to timing 4 until reaching timing 4, the probability mode may be highly accurate with a predetermined probability, and the execution frequency of the character effect may increase. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to predict that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state as so-called gas (false).

  Timing 6 shows the timing when 80 games are consumed after being controlled by RT1. In this embodiment, when the number of games controlled by RT1 and digested reaches 70 or more, the game is still in RT, and since RT1 has a maximum number of games of 70, it is controlled to RT2. It can be said. In this embodiment, RT2 is controlled continuously for at least 100 in principle. For this reason, even if it is controlled to RT2 of 100 games with the shortest number of specified games after RT1 is controlled, for example, RT1 is controlled to replay (4) in the first game and the specified number of games is controlled to RT2. RT is continued until the 101st game after being controlled. Therefore, when the number of games digested after being controlled by RT1 becomes 70 games or more, RT is not completed unless at least 30 games are digested. For this reason, even if the probability mode becomes high or the stage is changed from when the number of games controlled and controlled by RT1 reaches 70 games until 10 games are digested, the player predicts Very unlikely to work. As a result, even if a process of making the probability mode highly accurate or a process of changing the stage is performed between 70 games and 80 games after being controlled by RT1, it cannot contribute to the enhancement of the fun of the game. For this reason, wasteful processing such as changing the probability mode and the stage is performed by setting the period (timing 5 to timing 6) from the time when 70 games are consumed to the time when 10 games are consumed to the time when 10 games are consumed. Is preventing. On the other hand, it is possible to perform a process of changing the probability mode and the stage by setting the period after timing of the 80 games after the control of RT1 (timing 6 and later) as the changeable period, and the process is performed. This allows the player to make a prediction as described above.

  Timing 8 shows the timing when the specified number of games of RT2 is consumed from timing 3, and timing 7 shows the timing when the remaining number of games until the specified number of games is used reaches 20 games. That is, the timing 7 to the timing 8 indicate the period of the specific state described above, and the probability mode is likely to be highly accurate during this period, so the execution frequency of the character effect increases. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to predict that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state. Further, even in the non-specific state from timing 6 to timing 7 until the timing 7 is reached, there is a possibility that the probability mode becomes highly accurate with a predetermined probability and the execution frequency of the character effect increases. For this reason, it is possible to cause the player to predict that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state as so-called gas (false).

  In FIG. 20, an example in which the specified number of games is controlled to RT1 of 70 games is described, and an example in which the specific state is between 50 games and 70 games after being controlled to RT1 has been described. The specific state when the specified number of games is controlled to RT1 of 30 games is between 10 games and 30 games after being controlled by RT1, and the specific state when the specified number of games is controlled to RT1 of 50 games is RT1. Will be between 30 games and 50 games. In FIG. 20, the specific state when paying attention to the number of games has been described. However, as described above, when the big bonus is won, the game state becomes the specific state regardless of the number of games.

Next, main effects obtained by the first embodiment described above will be described.
(1-1) The termination conditions for RT1 and RT2 in the above-described embodiment are not satisfied even if the big bonus is won unless the big bonus is won. As a result, even if the big bonus is won, if it is not won, the RT can be controlled continuously until the specified number of games is reached. For this reason, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of loss by ending RT because the big bonus is won when there are remaining games.

  Also, especially during RT, even if a stop operation is performed aiming at a big bonus, replay is won with a very high probability, and control with replay is prioritized over control with big bonus. It will be difficult to determine whether or not the winner has been won. In addition, since the big bonus winning flag is carried over after the next game until the big bonus is won, after the RT reaches the specified number of games, it is possible to win the big bonus won during that time Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the big bonus at the end of RT.

  (1-2) Also, as described above, replays (2) to (4) are lottery with higher probability than in the initial gaming state when RT1 is won with high probability for replay (1). Is done. Further, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. As a result, even when the player is awarded one of the replays (2) to (4) and is controlled by RT2 during RT1, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that it is controlled by RT2. Even if it is specified that the game is controlled by RT2, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many games RT2 are controlled by. Further, even when controlled to RT2, as described in the timing 3 of FIG. 20, the RT effect continuously performed from the previous game is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to obscure the number of end games of a series of RTs.

  On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 16, the probability that the number of remaining games until the specified number of games is exhausted is higher in the specific state after reaching the non-specific state before reaching 20 games. Thus, the probability mode is determined with high accuracy. When the probability mode is highly accurate, the frequency of the character effect is increased. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the game state is the specific state indirectly by predicting the probability mode from the frequency at which the character effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the probability mode is set with high accuracy during RT, compared to the non-specific state. In the specific state, the second stage is determined with a higher probability. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the game state is a specific state, not only from the frequency at which the character effect is executed, but also from the type of stage. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed and the type of stage being transferred, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when the big bonus is won during RT, the game state becomes a specific state regardless of the number of games, and the probability mode is determined with high probability. . For this reason, the player predicts whether or not the player is in a specific state according to the frequency at which the character effect is executed, and varies the expectation for winning the big bonus according to the prediction result. Can do. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (4) In the conventional slot machine, since the stage is set to a predetermined stage only when the setting is changed, the player can guess whether the setting has been changed by comparing the stages before and after the setting change. There was a fear. Therefore, the slot machine in the above-described embodiment is configured such that the second stage is set as the stage default at the time of activation. Thereby, the stage at the time of activation becomes the second stage regardless of whether or not the setting has been changed, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that is predicted by the player as to whether or not the setting has been changed. On the other hand, if the second stage is set only at the time of activation, the stage at the time of activation is always the second stage, so that there is a possibility that the interest and the operation rate at the time of activation are reduced. Therefore, in order to prevent a decrease in interest and operating rate at the time of activation, as described with reference to FIG. 19 (b), when the first game is started after the slot machine is activated, a predetermined game is started. The stage was changed with a higher probability than when the number was digested. As a result, it is possible to vary the type of stage at the time of start-up while preventing the occurrence of inconvenience predicted by the player as to whether or not the above-described setting change has been performed. It is possible to prevent the rate from decreasing.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 19B, when the first game is started after the slot machine is activated, the set values 4 to 6 are set when the stage is up. It is possible for the player to predict that there is a high possibility that the set value 1 to 3 is set when the stage is down. For this reason, the interest of the game can be improved and the operating rate of the slot machine at the time of activation can be improved.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIG. 19C, the stage is changed when the character effect is executed during RT. For this reason, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the stage is shifted when the high-accuracy probability mode in which the character effect is executed is high. Moreover, since the stage of the character is changed and the stage is changed, it is possible to effectively ask whether or not it is in a specific state.

Second Embodiment In the first embodiment described above, the probability is determined as a probability mode with a higher probability when the game state in RT is in the specific state than in the non-specific state, and the probability is An example has been described in which the stage is determined according to the distribution ratio according to whether the mode is highly accurate and the game state is the specific state. In the second embodiment, the specific stage is determined with a higher probability when the game state during RT is in the specific state than when the game state is in the non-specific state, and whether the stage is the specific stage and An example in which the probability mode is determined according to the distribution ratio according to whether the game state is the specific state will be described.

  Note that, in the second embodiment, detailed description of portions that perform the same configuration and processing as those in the first embodiment is omitted, and portions that are different from the first embodiment are mainly described.

  In the second embodiment, the stage to be transferred is determined according to a different allocation rate depending on the game state during RT. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a stage determination table used when determining a stage.

  When the game state during RT is a specific state when the number of remaining games up to the controlled number of controlled RT games is 20 games or when a big bonus is won, The first stage is determined with a probability of 20%, the second stage with a probability of 20%, and the third stage with a probability of 60%.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a non-specific state different from the specific state, the first stage has a 35% probability, the second stage has a 35% probability, and the third stage has a 30% probability. Determined with probability.

  As described above, when the game state is the specific state, it is possible to move to the third stage with a higher probability than when the game state is the non-specific state. As a result, the player can indirectly recognize that the game state is more likely to be a specific state when the stage is the third stage than when the stage is the first stage or the second stage. it can. For this reason, depending on the type of stage, the player's sense of tension and the player's expectation can be different from the fact that the player feels the tension and the big bonus that the number of remaining games of RT is reduced. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  The table shown in FIG. 21 is stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 performs the following process as a process for determining the stage based on the program stored in the ROM 91b.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs a counting process that counts the number of digested games. Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs a determination process for determining whether or not the current game state is the specific state when 10 games are consumed during RT, and refers to the table shown in FIG. 21 in the specific state. Stage determination processing for determining the stage is performed according to the distribution ratio according to whether or not there is. Therefore, the stage can be changed in conjunction with game digestion during RT.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs the above-described stage determination process also when receiving an internal winning command indicating winning in any of BB simultaneous winning small combination or replay (2) to (4). For this reason, when the stage shifts regardless of the number of games, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that the big bonus is won simultaneously or controlled by RT2. Note that the sub-control unit 91 does not perform the stage determination process and does not shift the stage for the same reason as described in the first embodiment, even during the RT, in the fixed period described later. Control. Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the second stage as the default of the stage when the control to RT1 is started.

  Next, the character effect will be described. The sub-control unit 91 performs a process of determining a probability mode for specifying the appearance rate of the character effect according to the distribution rate that varies depending on the stage and the game state during RT. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining a probability mode determination table used when determining the probability mode.

  When the game state is a non-specific state, the table shown in FIG. When the stage is shifted to the first stage, the low probability is determined with a probability of 80%, the normal with a probability of 10%, and the high probability with a probability of 10%. When the stage is shifted to the second stage, the low accuracy is determined with a probability of 10%, the normal is with a probability of 80%, and the high accuracy is determined with a probability of 10%. When the stage is shifted to the third stage, the low accuracy is determined with a probability of 10%, the normal is with a probability of 10%, and the high accuracy is determined with a probability of 80%.

  When the game state is a specific state, the table shown in FIG. When the stage is shifted to the first stage, the probability is usually determined with a probability of 20% and the probability is determined with a probability of 80%. When transitioning to the second stage, low probability is determined with a probability of 10%, normal with a probability of 10%, and high probability with a probability of 80%. When the stage is shifted to the third stage, the low accuracy is determined with a probability of 80%, the normal with a probability of 10%, and the high accuracy with a probability of 10%.

  As a result, when the game state is a non-specific state and the state is shifted to the first stage or the second stage, the probability mode is determined with a low probability or a high probability rather than a high probability, and the third When the stage is shifted, the probability mode is determined with a low probability or a high probability that is higher than normal.

  Further, when the game state is the specific state and the stage is shifted to the first stage or the second stage, the probability mode is determined with a high probability that the low probability or the high probability is higher than the normal, and the third When the stage is shifted to, the probability mode is determined with a probability that the normal mode or the low accuracy is higher than the high accuracy.

  In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 21, the third stage is determined with a higher probability when the game state is the specific state than when the game state is the non-specific state. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 22, the probability mode is determined according to the distribution rate specified based on whether or not the game state is the specific state and the stage.

  As a result, when the game state is the non-specific state, the first stage or the second stage is shifted with a higher probability than the third stage as shown in FIG. 21, so that the state shown in FIG. The probability mode is determined with a lower probability or a higher probability than a high probability. As a result, when the game state is a non-specific state, the probability that the frequency of character effects is low increases.

  Further, when the game state is a specific state, the third stage is shifted with a higher probability than the first stage or the second stage as shown in FIG. 21, so the probability as shown in FIG. 22 (b). The mode is determined with a higher probability of normal or low accuracy than high accuracy. As a result, it is considered that the relationship shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of the prediction based on the combination of the prediction based on the type of stage and the frequency of character effects, as to whether or not the game state is a specific state.

  When transitioning to the first stage or the second stage, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is more likely to be a non-specific state than when transitioning to the third stage. Furthermore, even when the stage is shifted to the first stage or the second stage, it is shown that the probability mode is lower or normal than when the probability mode is high from the distribution ratio of FIG. However, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the game state is highly likely to be an unspecified state is higher.

  On the other hand, when the stage is shifted to the third stage, the player can recognize that the game state is more likely to be a specific state than when the stage is shifted to the first stage or the second stage. Further, even when the stage is shifted to the third stage, the game state is lower when the probability mode is normal or highly accurate than when the probability mode is normal or highly accurate. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state is higher. In this way, depending on not only the type of stage but also the frequency of the character production, the game with respect to the feeling of tension and big bonus that the player has for the fact that the number of remaining games of RT is decreasing The feeling of expectation held by the person can be made different, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during RT, you may comprise so that the judgment criteria of whether it is a specific state as shown in FIG. 23 may be alert | reported. Thereby, it can be made easier to predict whether or not the player is in a specific state.

  The table shown in FIG. 22 is stored in the ROM 91b of the sub control unit 91. The sub-control unit 91 performs the following process as a process for determining the probability mode based on the program stored in the ROM 91b.

  The sub-control unit 91 performs determination processing for determining whether or not the current game state is the specific state when 5 games are consumed during RT based on the counting result, and refers to the table shown in FIG. Probability mode determination processing is performed in which a probability mode is determined in accordance with the distribution ratio according to whether or not the current state is a specific state and the stage. For this reason, the frequency of character effects can be changed in conjunction with game digestion during RT.

  Also, the sub-control unit 91 performs the above-described probability mode determination process when receiving an internal winning command indicating BB simultaneous winning small combination winning or replay (2) to (4) winning. For this reason, when the frequency of character effects changes irrespective of the number of games, it is possible to improve the expectation that the big bonus is won simultaneously or controlled by RT2. When the stage is changed, the sub-control unit 91 performs the probability mode determination process according to the changed stage. Further, the sub-control unit 91 does not perform the probability mode determination process for the same reason described in the first embodiment, and the frequency of the character effect is high during the fixed period described later even during RT. Control so that it does not change. Further, the sub-control unit 91 sets the low probability as the default of the probability mode when the control to RT1 is started.

Next, main effects obtained by the second embodiment will be described.
(1) Similar to the first embodiment, the number of games that have ended in a series of RTs is difficult to understand. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. The third stage is shifted to the third stage with a higher probability in the specific state after reaching the non-specific state than in the non-specific state. For this reason, the player can indirectly predict whether or not the game state is the specific state from the type of the stage. As a result, the player can be focused on the type of stage, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIGS. 22 (a) and (b), when the state is shifted to the third stage during RT, it is specified more than in the non-specific state. The probability mode is determined with low probability with higher probability when the state is in the state. For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the game state is the specific state not only from the type of stage but also from the frequency at which the character effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed and the type of stage being transferred, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, when a big bonus is won during RT, the game state becomes a specific state regardless of the number of games, and the stage is shifted to the third stage with high probability. For this reason, the player predicts whether or not the player is in a specific state depending on whether or not the stage is shifted to the third stage, and has a sense of expectation that the player has won the big bonus according to the prediction result. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of stage and improve the interest of the game.

  Regarding the second embodiment described above, the same technical effect as in the case of the first embodiment described above can be obtained with the configuration based on the technical idea common to the first embodiment described above.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modifications of the above-described embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

  (1-1) In the embodiment described above, the combinations of replays (2) to (4) that trigger the control of RT2 are all combinations of “replay” and “bell”. As for the combination of replay (1), which has a high probability when controlled by RT1, the combination of “replay” and “bell” (for example, “bell” is similar to replays (2) to (4)). -Bell-Replay "etc.). In addition, the combination of replays (1) to (4) is not limited to a combination of a plurality of symbols, and may be configured of symbols different for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, “bell-replay-orange”, “plum-bell-watermelon”, and the like may be used. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the player has won the replay (1) or the replay (2) to (4) when the player is in RT and has won a replay. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of games for which a series of RTs are completed.

  (1-2) In the embodiment described above, the combination of the big bonuses (1) to (3) that triggers the control to RT1 is the combination of the same symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. However, the present invention is not limited to the same symbol, and may be different symbols for the left reel, middle reel, and right reel. For example, the big bonus (1) may be “red 7-grape-melon”, the big bonus (2) may be “grape-white 7-black BAR”, and the like. Thereby, when a big bonus is won, it can be made difficult to understand which big bonus is won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  Further, in such a configuration, the bonus effect may be such that the player cannot specify the type of bonus being controlled by performing the same content regardless of the type of bonus. This makes it difficult for the player to identify the type of bonus from the combination of symbols at the end of the game, making it difficult for the player to notice which type of bonus is being controlled. For this reason, it becomes difficult to specify the prescribed number of games of RT1 controlled after the bonus ends. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to specify the number of games for which a series of RTs will end, and to make the player pay attention to the above-described continuous production and final game production, effectively improving the interest of the game. it can.

  (1-3) The display screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is larger than the area of the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2 and close to the height of the player's line of sight than the see-through window 3 of the variable display device 2. You may install in the position which is easy to visually recognize. Then, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, a virtual reel for scrolling the symbols in accordance with the display state of the variable display device 2 is displayed, and the effect symbols corresponding to the display results of the variable display device 2 are displayed in a variable manner. You may comprise so that it may display on the winning line of the virtual reel to make. Specifically, when a combination of bells is derived in the variable display device 2, “bell-bell-bell” may be stopped and displayed on a winning line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, the player can proceed with the game by viewing the variable reels 2 by displaying the virtual reels. In such a slot machine, when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) that triggers the control of the RT1 is won, the display on the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed regardless of the type of the big bonus won. You may comprise so that common "7-7-7" may be stopped and displayed on the winning line in a screen. Further, when any one of the replays (2) to (4) that triggers the control of the replay (1) and the above RT2 wins, regardless of the type of the replay that has won, You may comprise so that common "replay-replay-replay" may be stopped and displayed on a winning line. This makes it difficult for a player who views the liquid crystal display 51 to proceed with the game to determine which type of big bonus has been won and which type of replay has been won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which RT2 is controlled by winning one of the replays (2) to (4) in which the winning probability is improved during RT1 has been described. However, the combination of symbols that trigger the control to RT2 is not limited to the combination of symbols of winning combinations that improve the winning probability during RT1, but may be a combination of symbols of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations In addition, a combination of a plurality of specific off-signs that are stopped and displayed on the winning line only when a predetermined winning combination is won may be used. Depending on which of a plurality of predetermined winning combinations is won or which of a plurality of specific off-combination combinations is stopped, the prescribed number of games may be controlled to be different RT.

  The plurality of predetermined winning combinations may be, for example, a plurality of winning combinations whose winning probability increases during a single bonus in which a single bonus is won and transferred to the next one game. In this case, the combination of symbols of the single bonus and the predetermined winning combination may be composed of symbols different for the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. For example, “watermelon-replay-orange”, “replay-bell-watermelon”, and the like may be used. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a single bonus has been won and that a predetermined winning combination has been won. As a result, it is difficult to understand how many games RT are controlled.

  (3) As an end condition of a series of RTs in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the conditions are established by using a prescribed number of games or winning a big bonus. However, a series of RT end conditions is not limited to this, and may be configured to be satisfied by a predetermined stop combination of RT end symbols.

  The predetermined RT end symbol combination may be, for example, a symbol combination constituting black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry among the winning combinations shown in FIG. That is, if any cherry wins during RT, the RT ends even if the specified number of games has not been reached since the start of the RT.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the reel 2L, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry symbols ("black cherry", "net cherry", and "white cherry") are respectively 21 frames. Are arranged at intervals of 7 frames. For this reason, an appropriate timing for stopping the “black cherry” of the reel 2L on the winning line, an appropriate timing for stopping the “net cherry” on the winning line, and a stop timing for “white cherry” on the winning line. The proper timings of each do not overlap each other. That is, there is no common timing that can target any two symbols of “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry”. In addition, even when the stop switch 8L is operated at any timing, any one of “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry” can be stopped on the winning line. For this reason, there is no timing for not stopping “black cherry”, “net cherry”, and “white cherry” on the winning line. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries if the stop operation is not performed within the drawing range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combinations of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries can be aligned. Also, even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on one of the winning lines, the symbols that make up the special combination on the middle reel and the right reel will be separated by four or more intervals. Since there is a stop operation position where the constituent symbols cannot be pulled in, the combination of special roles can be avoided. As a result, even if any cherries or special roles are elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherries, net cherries, white cherries, or special roles It is possible to avoid the end of RT due to winning a cherry or special role.

  As a result, even after the start of RT, even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at a timing outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination, that is, a game operation that avoids the winning combination of the falling combination. RT can be continued by a person's technical intervention, so the interest associated with RT can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the left reel, there is an area where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol is drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if one of the cherries is won during RT, it is impossible to deliberately remove the cherry if the type is not known The winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but if the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role has been won, the RT will end. Become. As a result, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not the RT is continued depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with the RT can be further enhanced.

  In addition, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are accompanied by payout of three or less medals, which is the number of medals necessary to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Because it is a prize (with a maximum of two payouts), even if avoiding a falling role, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry The payout rate of the machine 1 is not greatly affected.

  When a predetermined notification condition is established, a navigation effect is performed when one of the falling cherries, black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry, is won. For this reason, when a navigation effect is being performed, even if a fallen winning combination is won, based on the navigation effect, an operation procedure that avoids the winning of the falling combination, that is, a player outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination Since the player can perform the stop operation, that is, the RT can be continued by the player's game skill amount by the player's technical intervention, the interest associated with the RT can be enhanced.

  The combination of predetermined RT end symbols may be a specific replay different from the replays (1) to (4). In this case, the probability of winning a specific replay may differ depending on the type of bonus that triggered the control of the RT and the types of replays (2) to (4). Thereby, it is possible to make a player pay more attention to which type of bonus is controlled and which type of replay among the replays (2) to (4) is won.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the replays (2) to (4) are not read out as an internal lottery target role when in the initial gaming state. Even when it is, the replays (2) to (4) may be read and won with a low probability (for example, each determination value is “1”). Thereby, even in the initial gaming state, the player can have a sense of expectation for being controlled by RT2 without going through RT1.

  (5-1) In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the probability mode has a higher probability when the game state during RT is in the specific state than when it is in the non-specific state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability is determined as a probability mode with a higher probability when the game state in the RT is in the non-specific state than in the specific state. You may comprise as follows. For example, the probability mode is determined according to the distribution rate in the non-specific state in FIG. 16 when in the specific state, and the probability mode is determined according to the distribution rate in the specific state in FIG. 16 when in the non-specific state. You may comprise. Thereby, when the frequency of a character effect is high, a player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the game state is a non-specific state than when the frequency of a character effect is low. Moreover, even when the frequency of character effects is high, it is more apparent when the stage type is the third stage than when the stage type is the first stage or the second stage, based on the distribution ratio of FIG. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the game state is likely to be a non-specific state is high. On the other hand, when the frequency of character effects is low, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is more likely to be a specific state than when the frequency of character effects is high. Furthermore, even when the frequency of character effects is low, it is more apparent when the stage type is the first stage or the third stage than when the stage type is the second stage, based on the distribution ratio of FIG. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the game state is likely to be a specific state is high.

  For this reason, the player can predict whether or not the game state is a specific state indirectly by predicting the probability mode from the frequency at which the character effect is executed, and if only the frequency at which the character effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to predict whether or not the game state is a specific state from the type of stage. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed and the type of stage, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, while predicting whether it is a specific state, the expectation with respect to having won the big bonus according to the prediction result can be varied.

  Note that when controlled by RT1, the probability mode has a higher probability when the game state in the RT is in the specific state than in the non-specific state due to random number lottery or selection operation by the player. It is possible to select either a pattern that determines the probability or a pattern that determines the probability as a probability mode with a higher probability when the game state in the RT is in the non-specific state than when the game state is in the specific state It may be configured. Thereby, since it becomes possible to change the judgment standard of whether it is a specific state whenever it is controlled by RT1, the interest of a game can be improved.

  When configured in this way, during RT, information regarding a determination criterion according to the selected pattern may be notified. For example, if the pattern that determines the probability mode as the probability mode is selected with a higher probability when the game state is the specific state than when the game state is the non-specific state, You may comprise so that the information which can specify that the possibility of a specific state is high is alert | reported. Thereby, it can be made easier to predict whether or not the player is in a specific state.

  (5-2) In the second embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 21, the game state during RT is more likely to be in the specific state than in the non-specific state. Although an example of determining the stage has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third stage is determined with a higher probability when the game state during RT is in the non-specific state than when it is in the specific state. May be. For example, the stage type is determined according to the allocation rate in the non-specific state in FIG. 21 when in the specific state, and the stage type according to the allocation rate in the specific state in FIG. 21 when in the non-specific state. May be determined. Thereby, in the first stage or the second stage, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is more likely to be a specific state than in the third stage. Furthermore, even in the first stage or the second stage, the game state is higher when the probability mode is more accurate than when the probability mode is low or normal from the distribution ratio of FIG. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that there is a high possibility of being in a specific state is higher. On the other hand, in the third stage, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is more likely to be a non-specific state than in the first stage or the second stage. Also, even in the third stage, the game state is in a non-specific state when the probability mode is higher than when the probability mode is low or normal from the distribution ratio of FIG. It is possible to make the player recognize that the reliability of the prediction that the possibility of being is high is higher. For this reason, not only the type of stage, but also the player's feeling of tension and big bonus that the player has for the fact that the number of remaining RT games is decreasing, depending on the frequency of the character production. Can have different expectations and can improve the fun of the game. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the frequency at which the character effect is executed and the type of stage, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, while predicting whether it is a specific state, the expectation with respect to having won the big bonus according to the prediction result can be varied.

  In addition, when controlled by RT1, the third stage is more likely to be performed when the game state in the RT is in the specific state than in the non-specific state due to random number lottery or selection operation by the player. The pattern to be determined and the pattern for determining the third stage with a higher probability when the game state in the RT is in the non-specific state than when the game state is in the specific state can be selected. Good. Thereby, since it becomes possible to change the judgment standard of whether it is a specific state whenever it is controlled by RT1, the interest of a game can be improved.

  When configured in this way, during RT, information regarding a determination criterion according to the selected pattern may be notified. For example, when the game state is in the specific state rather than when the game state is in the non-specific state, during the RT in which the pattern for determining the third stage is selected with a higher probability, the state is shifted to the third stage You may comprise so that the information which can specify that the direction is more likely of a specific state is alert | reported. Thereby, it can be made easier to predict whether or not the player is in a specific state.

  (6) In the embodiment described above, a period during which the process of changing the probability mode or stage cannot contribute to the interest of the game is defined as a fixed period, and a predetermined condition is satisfied during the fixed period Even so, an example in which the process of changing the probability mode and the stage is not performed and the fixed period is constant (10 games) has been described. However, the fixed period is not limited to a fixed one, but may be changed according to the number of games specified for RT1 and RT2. For example, the number of games for a fixed period is selected from 10 to 20 games when the specified number of games is controlled to 30 RT1, and between 10 to 30 games when the specified number of games is controlled to 50 RT1. When the specified number of games is controlled to RT1 of 70, the game may be selected from 10 to 50 games. Also, the number of games for a fixed period is selected from 10 to 20 games after the control to RT1 is started and 70 games are digested when the specified number of games is controlled to RT2 of 100. When the number is controlled to RT2 of 150, the control to RT1 is started and the game is selected from 10 to 30 games after the 70 games are digested, and when the prescribed number of games is controlled to RT2 of 200, control to RT1 It may be configured to select from 10 to 50 games after starting the game and digesting 70 games. This makes it possible to change the fixed period every time it is controlled by the RT, and to add an interesting aspect to the game that the player predicts the specified number of games of the RT from the fixed period.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the number of games in a specific state is constant (20 games) has been described. However, the number of games in a specific state is not limited to a fixed number, and may vary depending on the prescribed number of games RT1 and RT2. For example, the number of games in a specific state is selected from 10 to 20 games when control to RT1 with a specified number of games is started, and when control to RT1 with 50 specified games is started. It may be configured to select from 10 to 30 games and select from 10 to 50 games when the control to the RT1 with the specified number of games is 70 is started. In addition, the number of games to be in a specific state is selected from among 10 to 20 games when the control to the RT2 with the specified number of games is 100, and the control to the RT2 with the specified number of games is started with 150. The game may be selected from 10 to 30 games, and selected from 10 to 50 games when the control of the prescribed game number 200 to RT2 is started. Thereby, it is possible to change the number of games to be in a specific state every time it is controlled by RT.

  (7) In the first embodiment described above, paying attention to the probability mode change probability that the probability mode is changed during RT and the appearance rate of the character effect for each probability mode, the level is set as follows: May be.

  For example, if the probability mode change probability is set higher than the appearance rate of the character effect when the probability mode is highly accurate, the probability mode is changed before the character effect appears regardless of the type of the probability mode. Therefore, the slot machine is difficult to predict the probability mode for the player.

  Further, when the probability mode change probability is set between the appearance rate of the character effect with the high probability and the appearance rate of the character effect with the low probability, the character effect appears when the probability mode is high. Although the possibility is high, the probability mode is still likely to be changed before the character effect appears at normal or low probability, so that it is possible to make the slot machine in which the probability mode is difficult for the player to predict.

  On the other hand, if the probability mode change probability is set lower than the appearance rate of the character production in which the probability mode is low probability, the character mode is changed before the probability mode is changed even when the probability mode is low probability. Since there is a high possibility that an effect will appear, a slot machine in which the probability mode can be easily predicted for the player can be provided. Therefore, as the probability mode change probability is set to be lower than the appearance rate of the character production with the low probability mode, the probability mode becomes easier to predict, and as a result, it becomes easier to predict whether or not it is in a specific state. be able to.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the RT1 is controlled after the end of the predetermined bonus (big bonus) has been described. In addition, as the type of RT1, the example in which the prescribed number of games is different depending on the type of bonus that has been finished has been described, but not limited to this, the probability of winning a replay may be different. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to what kind of RT is controlled, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In this case, the probability of winning at least replay b and replay c among a plurality of types of replays (for example, replay a to replay c) is further controlled in RT (here, RT1) controlled after the end of a predetermined bonus. The number of determination values may be set to be higher than that in the initial gaming state. Thereby, when controlled by RT1, the probability of winning replay b and replay c is improved. Replay b and replay c can be won only at RT1, and are not won in gaming states other than RT1 (including those that are not read out as lottery targets and those with a judgment value of 0). May be.

  Further, when the player wins Replay b when the player is RT1, the player has a higher probability of winning Replay a than the player who is RT1 (in this case, RT2). When replay c is won, the probability of winning replay a is lower than when RT2 is reached, and even when replay b is won, RT is disadvantageous for the player who is not controlled by RT2 (here, RT3). You may comprise. As a result, when controlled to RT1, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning the replay b and being controlled by the RT2, and having anxiety about winning the replay c and being controlled by the RT3. It is possible to improve the interest of the game as compared to a slot machine that is not controlled by RT2 or RT3.

  In addition, RT1 includes a plurality of types of RTs having different probabilities of at least one of the probability of winning replay b and the probability of winning replay c. (1) RT1 at the end, RT1 ′ at the end of the big bonus (2), RT1 ″ at the end of the big bonus (3), etc. In other words, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the bonus is controlled to RT1 of a type having a high probability of winning replay b, and RT1 more advantageous depending on the type of bonus to be controlled. (The RT that has a high probability of winning Replay b) Can, compared to what is controlled in the same RT regardless of the type of bonus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (9) The RT in the embodiment described above is an RT in which the winning probability of replay is improved from the initial gaming state, but there is a high possibility that the number of medals to be acquired is low as in the initial gaming state, that is, one game The RT may be an RT in which the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets. The expected value of the number of medals acquired per game is, for example, the number of medals acquired when a game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times, 100,000 times) in a certain gaming state. The value (theoretical value) divided by the number of times the number of winning is subtracted.

  In the case of such a configuration, when a bonus is won during RT or when a predetermined notification condition (specific symbol winning, specific symbol combination derivation, etc.) is satisfied, derivation is performed by, for example, a predetermining means. Procedure notification game state (hereinafter referred to as a state where a navigation effect is performed) for notifying the type of award winning (small role) determined to be permitted or an operation procedure (operation timing, operation order, etc.) for generating the winning award, Whether to control to AT), and when controlling to AT, the number of AT continuing games to be controlled by AT is determined, and when it is determined to control to AT, the number of AT continuing games is consumed or bonus You may comprise so that it may control to RT + AT until winning and RT is complete | finished. And during RT + AT, the expected value of the number of medals earned per game is made larger than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets by winning the selected small role according to the navigation effect without missing it. The number of medals owned by the player may be increased. Further, when the player is further controlled by the AT during the RT, the player can have a sense of expectation that the bonus may have been won, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, even if the bonus is not won, the player is given a sense of expectation because it is controlled to RT + AT when the predetermined notification condition described above is satisfied.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the slot machine to which medals are applied as a game medium used for setting a bet number or giving a game value accompanying winning is described as an example. However, the slot machine embodying the present invention may be a slot machine (so-called parrot) to which a game ball used in a pachinko gaming machine is applied as a game medium. When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when three bets are set in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  (11) In the above embodiment, the slot machine that sets the bet number using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the bet number is set using game balls. Or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in game balls, and a take-in ball that detects game balls taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set the number of bets using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning occurs.

  (12) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view showing the whole structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol on each reel which comprises a variable display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the control circuit of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart which shows the output condition of a medal IN signal, (b) is a timing chart which shows the output condition of a medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of the start of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of winning combination, the combination of the symbol in a variable display apparatus, the game state read as a lottery object combination, and other information. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for character production execution determination. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for probability mode determination in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for stage determination used when determining the stage which transfers in RT in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability of the prediction by the combination of the prediction by the frequency of character production, and a stage about whether a game state is a specific state. It is a figure for demonstrating specifically the other table for table determination. It is a timing chart for concretely explaining whether it is in a specific state corresponding to a game state, and whether it is a fixed period. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for stage determination in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the table for probability mode determination in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability of the prediction by the combination of the prediction by the kind of stage and the frequency of character production | presentation about whether a game state is a specific state.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 51 liquid crystal Display, 90 stage control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM, 92 display control circuit, 141 VDP, 142 CGROM, 155 temporary storage memory, 156 frame buffer memory.

Claims (4)

Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
It is possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions by setting the bet number of the predetermined number for a game using the value for a game, after displaying varying variable display portion of the plurality of, the variable display of the variable display portion of the plurality of I by that display the results are derived by stopping the variable display of a plurality of variable display portions is completed, the combination of Viewing the results of the variable display portion of the plurality of In the slot machine where winning can occur according to
Before every game Viewing results are derived, it is possible to the next game without using a special pay and the value for a game with the transition to advantageous special game state for the player than the normal game state Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow each of a plurality of types of winnings including possible re-game winnings;
Depending on the determination result of the pre-determining means, and deriving a control means for deriving Viewing result,
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
A high probability state control means for controlling the probability that the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means to a high probability state higher than the normal gaming state;
Production execution means for executing the production,
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High-probability state ending means for ending the high-probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize has reached the specified game number; ,
A remaining game number specifying difficulty making unit that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games by making it difficult to specify the trigger of control to the high probability state,
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize,
The effect execution means is a predetermined probability mode in which an effect execution probability determined to execute a specific effect is a predetermined probability in the high probability state, and a high in which the effect execution probability is higher than the predetermined probability. Probability mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of probability modes including at least a probability mode,
The probability mode control means controls the high probability mode with a higher probability after reaching the predetermined number of games than before the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games reaches the predetermined number of games,
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games. A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state .
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The And wherein the Nau, slot machine. Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, it becomes possible to start the variable display of the plurality of variable display units, and after the variable display units are displayed in a variable manner, The display of the display results is derived by stopping the display of the variation of the plurality of variable display units, whereby the display of the variation of the plurality of variable display units is terminated, and a winning is obtained according to the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units. In slot machines that can occur,
Before the display result is derived for each game, it is possible to perform the next game without using the special prize with the transition to the special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and the above game value. Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a re-game winning
Derivation control means for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
A high probability state control means for controlling the probability that the re-game winning is permitted by the prior determination means to a high probability state higher than the normal gaming state;
Production execution means for executing the production,
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High-probability state ending means for ending the high-probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize has reached the specified game number; ,
A remaining game number specifying difficulty making unit that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games by making it difficult to specify the trigger of control to the high probability state,
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means may perform the re-game while carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize.
When it is determined to allow the occurrence of a game winning, the re-game winning is generated without generating the special winning,
The effect execution means is a predetermined probability mode in which an effect execution probability determined to execute a specific effect is a predetermined probability in the high probability state, and a high in which the effect execution probability is higher than the predetermined probability. Probability mode control means for controlling to any one of a plurality of types of probability modes including at least a probability mode,
The probability mode control means controls the high probability mode with a higher probability after reaching the predetermined number of games than before the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games reaches the predetermined number of games,
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games, and the end of the period A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation unit is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation unit. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The And wherein the Nau, slot machine. Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, it becomes possible to start the variable display of the plurality of variable display units, and after the variable display units are displayed in a variable manner, The display of the display results is derived by stopping the display of the variation of the plurality of variable display units, whereby the display of the variation of the plurality of variable display units is terminated, and a winning is obtained according to the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display units. In slot machines that can occur,
Before the display result is derived for each game, it is possible to perform the next game without using the special prize with the transition to the special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and the above game value. Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the generation of each of a plurality of types of winnings including a re-game winning
Derivation control means for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
There is a probability that the pre-determining means determines that the re-game winning is permitted.
High probability state control means for controlling to a high probability state higher than the normal gaming state,
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High-probability state ending means for ending the high-probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize has reached the specified game number; ,
A remaining game number specifying difficulty making unit that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games by making it difficult to specify the trigger of control to the high probability state,
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize,
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games, and the end of the period A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The effect mode changing means is a specific effect among a plurality of types of effect modes with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before the predetermined number of games. Change to aspect,
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the third decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the third decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the fourth determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the fourth determination and the probability of the fourth determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The And wherein the Nau, slot machine. Provided with a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable,
It is possible to start variable display of a plurality of variable display portions by setting the bet number of the predetermined number for a game using the value for a game, after displaying varying variable display portion of the plurality of, the variable display of the variable display portion of the plurality of I by that display the results are derived by stopping the variable display of a plurality of variable display portions is completed, the combination of Viewing the results of the variable display portion of the plurality of In the slot machine where winning can occur according to
Before every game Viewing results are derived, it is possible to the next game without using a special pay and the value for a game with the transition to advantageous special game state for the player than the normal game state Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow each of a plurality of types of winnings including possible re-game winnings;
Depending on the determination result of the pre-determining means, and deriving a control means for deriving Viewing result,
A carry-over means for carrying on the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize after the next game when the prior-decision means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur and the special prize has not occurred; ,
High probability state control means for controlling to a high probability state that the probability that the pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the re-game win is higher than the normal gaming state,
The high probability state control means includes:
After the high probability state is started, if the pre-determining means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur before the number of games digested reaches a predetermined number of games, High-probability state ending means for ending the high-probability state when the special prize is generated without ending the probability state or when the number of games digested without the special prize has reached the specified game number; ,
A remaining game number specifying difficulty making unit that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of games up to the specified number of games by making it difficult to specify the trigger of control to the high probability state,
The pre-determining means allows the occurrence of the special prize in a state where the decision to allow the special prize to be allowed is not carried over by the carryover means and the special prize among the general prizes other than the special prize. It can be determined at the same time that the general winning is allowed,
The derivation control means does not generate the special prize and does not generate the special prize when it is determined that the special game prize is allowed to occur while carrying over the decision to allow the special prize. Generate a prize,
The slot machine is
In the high probability state, high probability state effect execution means for executing a high probability state effect different from the effect executed in the normal gaming state,
When the special general prize is generated in the high probability state, the effect mode of the high probability state effect being executed is changed regardless of whether or not the generation of the special prize is permitted. Production mode change determining means for determining whether or not,
An effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode of the high-probability state effect being executed when the effect mode change determining means determines that the effect mode is to be changed;
The high-probability state effect is different from the high-probability state effect, and after the high-probability state starts, the game continues for a period from the game before the predetermined number of games to the specified number of games before reaching the specified number of games, and the end of the period A continuous production execution means for executing a continuous production showing the production result of whether or not it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is sometimes permitted in the high probability state.
The effect mode changing means is a specific effect among a plurality of types of effect modes with a higher probability after the number of remaining games up to the specified number of games has reached the predetermined number of games than before the predetermined number of games. Change to aspect ,
The slot machine further comprises derivation operation means for causing the plurality of variable display sections to derive display results,
When the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means determines any display position from a display position located within a predetermined pull-in range as a display result of the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Performing control to derive based on the determination result of the prior determination means,
The pre-determining means includes
As a determination target in the same game, a first determination for independently determining that the first general winning among the general winnings is permitted, the first determining that the first general winning is permitted, and the first A second determination for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of a second general prize different from the general prize, simultaneously determining whether to allow the generation of the first general prize, and allow the occurrence of the special prize A third decision, a fourth decision for simultaneously determining whether the first general winning is allowed, the second general winning is allowed, and the special winning is allowed simultaneously. Is possible and
The ratio of the probability of making the fourth decision in the combined probability of the probability of making the first decision and the probability of making the fourth decision in the same game, the second decision being made in the same game The first to fourth determinations are performed with a probability that one of the ratios of the probabilities of the third determinations occupying the combined probability of the probability of the third determination and the probability of the third determination being made is higher than the other ratio. Do,
The derivation control means includes
When the first condition for which the first determination or the fourth determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation unit is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation unit. The first display position where the design symbol of the specific symbol combination stops on the first line among the plurality of lines straddling the plurality of variable display portions, and the second line among the plurality of lines In the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means, control is performed to derive the first display position when only the first display position is located among the second display positions at which the symbols of the symbol combination stop. Control is performed to derive the first display position when both the first display position and the second display position are within the predetermined pull-in range, corresponding to the derivation operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position of the first display position and the second display position is located within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit. Do
When the second condition for which the second determination or the third determination is made is satisfied, the derivation operation means is operated, and the predetermined pull-in range is displayed on the variable display unit corresponding to the derivation operation means. Control for deriving the first display position when only the first display position is located among the first display position and the second display position, and a variable display corresponding to the deriving operation means And a control for deriving the second display position when both the first display position and the second display position are located within the predetermined pull-in range in the section, corresponding to the deriving operation means Control for deriving the second display position when only the second display position is located among the first display position and the second display position within the predetermined pull-in range in the variable display unit The And wherein the Nau, slot machine.

Images